[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2003059947A1 - Regulation of human neurotransmitter transporter - Google Patents

Regulation of human neurotransmitter transporter Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2003059947A1
WO2003059947A1 PCT/EP2003/000025 EP0300025W WO03059947A1 WO 2003059947 A1 WO2003059947 A1 WO 2003059947A1 EP 0300025 W EP0300025 W EP 0300025W WO 03059947 A1 WO03059947 A1 WO 03059947A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
neurotransmitter transporter
polynucleotide
polypeptide
cells
activity
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/EP2003/000025
Other languages
French (fr)
Inventor
Jiing-Ren Liou
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Bayer AG
Original Assignee
Bayer AG
Bayer Healthcare AG
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Bayer AG, Bayer Healthcare AG filed Critical Bayer AG
Priority to AU2003235695A priority Critical patent/AU2003235695A1/en
Publication of WO2003059947A1 publication Critical patent/WO2003059947A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/705Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants
    • C07K14/70571Receptors; Cell surface antigens; Cell surface determinants for neuromediators, e.g. serotonin receptor, dopamine receptor
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K14/00Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K14/435Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans
    • C07K14/46Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates
    • C07K14/47Peptides having more than 20 amino acids; Gastrins; Somatostatins; Melanotropins; Derivatives thereof from animals; from humans from vertebrates from mammals
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • the invention relates to the regulation of human neurotransmitter transporter.
  • the general structure of all these gene products is very similar. They contain twelve potential transmembrane helices and an extended external loop with 3-4 glycosylation sites between membrane segments 3 and 4.
  • the calculated molecular weights of the transporters is about 70 kDa, and both their C- and N-terminal peripheral peptides contain about 40 amino acids and may be located on the cytoplasmic side of the membrane.
  • amino acid sequence of each member is 60-80% identical to the other members within a subfamily and about 40% identical to members between the two subfamilies (Liu et al, 1992).
  • Amino acid transporters such as the glycine transporter and proline transporter, share about 40-45% homology with all members of the neurotransmitter transporter superfamily. Sequence homology among the members of the neurotransmitter transporter family give clear indication that they evolved from a common ancestral gene. Moreover, partial genomic cloning of several neurotransmitter transporters reveal that in all of them the first intron in the reading frame is located in an identical position (id.).
  • amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2;
  • amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5; and the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5.
  • Yet another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease extracellular matrix degradation.
  • a test compound is contacted with a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
  • amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2;
  • amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5; and the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5.
  • Binding between the test compound and the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is detected.
  • a test compound which binds to the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing extracellular matrix degradation.
  • the agent can work by decreasing the activity of the neurotransmitter transporter.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease extracellular matrix degradation.
  • a test compound is contacted with a polynucleotide encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 ; the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1;
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3; the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LO NO: 3; n ⁇ cleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 4; and the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LD NO:4.
  • a test compound which binds to the polynucleotide is identified as a potential agent for decreasing extracellular matrix degradation.
  • the agent can work by decreasing the amount of the neurotransmitter transporter through interacting with the neurotransmitter transporter mRNA.
  • Another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which regulate extracellular matrix degradation.
  • a test compound is contacted with a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
  • amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ LD NO: 2; the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2;
  • amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5; and the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5.
  • a neurotransmitter transporter activity of the polypeptide is detected.
  • a test com- poimd which increases neurotransmitter transporter activity of the polypeptide relative to neurotransmitter transporter activity in the absence of the test compound is thereby identified as a potential agent for increasing extracellular matrix degradation.
  • a test compound which decreases neurotransmitter transporter activity of the polypeptide relative to neurotransmitter transporter activity in the absence of the test compound is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing extracellular matrix degradation.
  • Even another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease extracellular matrix degradation.
  • a test compound is contacted with a neurotransmitter transporter product of a polynucleotide which comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 ;
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50%) identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LD NO: 3; the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3;
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50%o identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LD NO: 4; and the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LD NO:4.
  • Binding of the test compound to the neurotransmitter transporter product is detected.
  • a test compound which binds to the neurotransmitter transporter product is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing extracellular matrix degradation.
  • Still another embodiment of the invention is a method of reducing extracellular matrix degradation.
  • a cell is contacted with a reagent which specifically binds to a polynucleotide encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or the product encoded by the polynucleotide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50%> identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 ; the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1; nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50%> identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LD NO: 3; the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3;
  • nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50%> identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 4; and the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ED NO: 4.
  • Neurotransmitter transporter activity in the cell is thereby decreased.
  • the invention thus provides a human neurotransmitter transporter that can be used to identify test compounds that may act, for example, as activators or inhibitors.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter and fragments thereof also are useful in raising specific antibodies that can block the protein and effectively reduce its activity.
  • Fig. 1 shows the .DNA-sequence encoding a neurotransmitter transporter poly- peptide (SEQ ID NO: 3).
  • Fig. 2 shows the amino acid sequence deduced from the DNA-sequence of Fig.1 (SEQ LD NO: 2).
  • Fig. 3 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (SEQ ID NO: 1).
  • Fig. 4 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (SEQ ED NO: 7).
  • Fig. 5 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (SEQ ED NO: 8).
  • Fig. 6 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (SEQ ID NO: 9).
  • Fig. 7 shows the transmembrane regions of SEQ ED NO: 2.
  • the invention relates to an isolated polynucleotide from the group consisting of:
  • a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
  • amino acid sequences which are at least about 95 % identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2;
  • amino acid sequences which are at least about 95 % identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5; and the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5.
  • a polynucleotide which hybridizes under stringent conditions to a polynucleotide specified in (a) and (b) and encodes a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide; d) a polynucleotide the sequence of which deviates from the polynucleotide sequences specified in (a) to (c) due to the degeneration of the genetic code and encodes a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide;
  • e a polynucleotide which represents a fragment, derivative or allelic variation of a polynucleotide sequence specified in (a) to (d) and encodes a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • a novel neurotransmitter transporter can be used in therapeutic methods to treat CNS disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, genitourological disorders, cancer, a hematological disorders, cardiovascular disorders, COPD and asthma.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter comprises the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2.
  • a DNA sequence encoding the human neurotransmitter transporter is shown in SEQ ID NO: 4.
  • Related ESTs are expressed in pancreas (insulinoma), testis, and normal nervous tissue.
  • Blast results show homology to a rat orphan sodium- and chloride-dependent neurotransmitter transporter NTT4 (94% identity with e-value of 0.0 over 744 amino acids) and a rat renal osmotic stress-induced NaCl organic solute cotransporter (41% identity with e-value of 5e-141 over 616 amino acids).
  • the rat orphan, sodium- and chloride-dependent neurotransmitter transporter NTT4 is shown in SEQ ID NO: 6). Both pfam and prosite searches identify sodium neurotransmitter symporter family regions (from residues 84 to 99 and from residues 167 to 188 of SEQ ID NO: 2). The C residue for disulfide bond is conserved in the sequence.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter of the invention is expected to be useful for the same purposes as previously identified neurotransmitter reporters. Human neurotransmitter transporter is believed to be useful in therapeutic methods to treat disorders such as CNS disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, genitourological disorders, cancer, hematological disorders, cardiovascular disorders, COPD, and asthma. Human neurotransmitter transporter also can be used to screen for human neurotransmitter transporter activators and inhibitors.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides comprise at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 744 contiguous amino acids selected from the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 750 or 795 contiguous amino acids selected from the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5 or a biologically active variant thereof, as defined below.
  • a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide of the invention therefore can be a portion of a neurotransmitter transporter protein, a full-length neurotransmitter transporter protein, or a fusion protein comprising all or a portion of a neurotransmitter transporter protein.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide variants which are biologically active, e.g., retain an enzymatic activity, also are human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides.
  • naturally or non-naturally occurring human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide variants have amino acid sequences which are at least about 95, 96, 97, 98, or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or 5 or a fragment thereof. Percent identity between a putative human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide variant and an amino acid sequence of SEQ
  • ID NO: 2 or 5 is determined by conventional methods. See, for example, Altschul et al., Bull Math. Bio. 48:603 (1986), and Henikoff & Henikoff, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 5P:10915 (1992). Briefly, two amino acid sequences are aligned to optimize the alignment scores using a gap opening penalty of 10, a gap extension penalty of 1, and the "BLOSUM62" scoring matrix of Henikoff & Henikoff, 1992.
  • the "FASTA” similarity search algorithm of Pearson & Lipman is a suitable protein alignment method for examining the level of identity shared by an amino acid sequence disclosed herein and the amino acid sequence of a putative variant.
  • the FASTA algorithm is described by
  • FASTA can also be used to determine the sequence identity of nucleic acid molecules using a ratio as disclosed above.
  • the ktup value can range between one to six, preferably from three to six, most preferably three, with other parameters set as default.
  • Variations in percent identity can be due, for example, to amino acid substitutions, insertions, or deletions.
  • Amino acid substitutions are defined as one for one amino acid replacements. They are conservative in nature when the substituted amino acid has similar structural and/or chemical properties. Examples of conservative replacements are substitution of a leucine with an isoleucine or valine, an aspartate with a glutamate, or a threonine with a serine.
  • Amino acid insertions or deletions are changes to or within an amino acid sequence. They typically fall in the range of about 1 to 5 amino acids. Guidance in determining which amino acid residues can be substituted, inserted, or deleted without abolishing biological or immunological activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be found using computer programs well known in the art, such as DNASTAR software.
  • the invention additionally, encompasses neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides that are differentially modified during or after translation, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications can be carried out by known techniques including, but not limited, to specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH , acetylation, formyla- tion, oxidation, reduction, metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin, etc.
  • Additional post-translational modifications encompassed by the invention include, for example, e.g., N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, processing of N- terminal or C-terminal ends), attachment of chemical moieties to the amino acid backbone, chemical modifications of N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, and addition or deletion of an N-terminal methionine residue as a result of prokaryotic host cell expression.
  • the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides may also be modified with a detectable label, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein.
  • the invention also provides chemically modified derivatives of neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides that may provide additional advantages such as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of the polypeptide, or decreased immuno- genicity (see U.S. Patent No. 4,179,337).
  • the chemical moieties for derivitization can be selected from water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol, and the like.
  • the polypeptides can be modified at random or predetermined positions within the molecule and can include one, two, three, or more attached chemical moieties.
  • Whether an amino acid change or a polypeptide modification results in a biologically active neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can readily be determined by assaying for neurotransmitter uptake, as is known in the art.
  • Fusion proteins are useful for generating antibodies against neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide amino acid sequences and for use in various assay systems.
  • fusion proteins can be used to identify proteins that interact with portions of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • Protein affinity chromatography or library-based assays for protein-protein interactions such as the yeast two-hybrid or phage display systems, can be used for this purpose. Such methods are well known in the art and also can be used as drug screens.
  • a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide fusion protein comprises two polypeptide segments fused together by means of a peptide bond.
  • the first polypeptide segment comprises at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 744 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ED NO: 2 or at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275,
  • the first polypeptide segment also can comprise full-length neurotransmitter transporter protein.
  • the second polypeptide segment can be a full-length protein or a protein fragment.
  • Proteins commonly used in fusion protein construction include ⁇ -galactosidase, ⁇ - glucuronidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP), autofluorescent proteins, including blue fluorescent protein (BFP), glutathione-S-transferase (GST), luciferase, horseradish peroxidase (HRP), and chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT).
  • GFP green fluorescent protein
  • BFP blue fluorescent protein
  • GST glutathione-S-transferase
  • luciferase luciferase
  • HRRP horseradish peroxidase
  • CAT chloramphenicol acetyltransferase
  • epitope tags are used in fusion protein constructions, including histidine (His) tags, FLAG tags, influenza hemagglutinin (HA) tags, Myc tags, VSV-G tags, and thioredoxin (Trx) tags.
  • fusion constructions can include maltose binding protein (MBP), S-tag, Lex a DNA binding domain (DBD) fusions, GAL4 DNA binding domain fusions, and herpes simplex virus (HSV) BP16 protein fusions.
  • MBP maltose binding protein
  • S-tag S-tag
  • GAL4 DNA binding domain fusions GAL4 DNA binding domain fusions
  • HSV herpes simplex virus
  • a fusion protein also can be engineered to contain a cleavage site located between the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide-encoding sequence and the heterologous protein sequence, so that the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be cleaved and purified away from the heterologous moiety.
  • a fusion protein can be synthesized chemically, as is known in the art.
  • a fusion protein is produced by covalently linking two polypeptide segments or by standard procedures in the art of molecular biology.
  • Recombinant DNA methods can be used to prepare fusion proteins, for example, by. making a DNA construct which comprises coding sequences selected from SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4 in proper reading frame with nucleotides encoding the second polypeptide segment and expressing the DNA construct in a host cell, as is known in the art.
  • kits for constructing fusion proteins are available from companies such as Promega Corporation (Madison, WI), Stratagene (La Jolla, CA), CLONTECH (Mountain View, CA), Santa Cruz Biotechnology (Santa Cruz, CA), MBL International Corporation (MIC; Watertown, MA), and Quantum Biotechnologies (Montreal, Canada; 1-888-DNA-KITS).
  • Species homologs of human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be obtained using neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide polynucleotides (described below) to make suitable probes or primers for screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast, identifying cDNAs which encode homologs of neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, and expressing the cDNAs as is known in the art.
  • a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be single- or double- stranded and comprises a coding sequence or the complement of a coding sequence for a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • a coding sequence for human neurotransmitter transporter is shown in SEQ ID NOs: 3 and 4.
  • nucleotide sequences encoding human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides as well as homologous nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, preferably about 75, 90, 96, 98, or 99% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4 or its complement also are neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. Percent sequence identity between the sequences of two polynucleotides is determined using computer programs such as ALIGN which employ the FASTA algorithm, using an affine gap search with a gap open penalty of -12 and a gap extension penalty of -2.
  • cDNA Complementary DNA
  • species homologs, and variants of neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides that encode biologically active neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides also are neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides.
  • Polynucleotide fragments comprising at least 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 20, or 25 contiguous nucleotides of SEQ ED NO: 1, 3 or 4 or its complement also are neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. These fragments, can be used, for example, as hybridization probes or as antisense oligonucleotides.
  • Variants and homologs of the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides described above also are neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides.
  • homologous neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide sequences can be identified by hybridization of candidate polynucleotides to known neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides under stringent conditions, as is known in the art.
  • homologous sequences can be identified which contain at most about 25-30%> basepair mismatches. More preferably, homologous nucleic acid strands contain 15-25%) basepair mismatches, even more preferably 5-15% basepair mismatches.
  • Species homologs of the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides disclosed herein also can be identified by making suitable probes or primers and screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast.
  • Human variants of neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides can be identified, for example, by screening human cDNA expression libraries. It is well known that the T m of a double-stranded DNA decreases by 1-1.5°C with every 1% decrease in homology (Bonner et al., J. Mol. Biol. 81, 123 (1973).
  • Variants of human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides or neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides of other species can therefore be identified by hybridizing a putative homologous neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide with a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4 or the complement thereof to form a test hybrid.
  • the melting temperature of the test hybrid is compared with the melting temperature of a hybrid comprising polynucleotides having perfectly complementary nucleotide sequences, and the number or percent of basepair mismatches within the test hybrid is calculated.
  • Nucleotide sequences which hybridize to neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides or their complements following stringent hybridization and or wash conditions also are neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides.
  • Stringent wash conditions are well known and understood in the art and are disclosed, for example, in Sambrook et al, MOLECULAR CLONING: A LABORATORY MANUAL, 2d ed., 1989, at pages 9.50-9.51.
  • T m of a hybrid between a neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4 or the complement thereof and a polynucleotide sequence which is at least about 50, preferably about 75, 90, 96, or 98% identical to one of those nucleotide sequences can be calculated, for example, using the equation of
  • Stringent wash conditions include, for example, 4X SSC at 65°C, or 50% formamide, 4X SSC at 42°C, or 0.5X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65°C.
  • Highly stringent wash conditions include, for example, 0.2X SSC at 65°C.
  • a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be isolated free of other cellular components such as membrane components, proteins, and lipids.
  • Poly- nucleotides can be made by a cell and isolated using standard nucleic acid purification techniques, or synthesized using an amplification technique, such as the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), or by using an automatic synthesizer. Methods for isolating polynucleotides are routine and are known in the art. Any such technique for obtaining a polynucleotide can be used to obtain isolated neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. For example, restriction enzymes and probes can be used to isolate polynucleotide fragments, which comprise neurotransmitter transporter nucleotide sequences. Isolated polynucleotides are in preparations that are free or at least 70, 80, or 90% free of other molecules.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter cDNA molecules can be made with standard molecular biology techniques, using neurotransmitter transporter mRNA as a template. Human neurotransmitter transporter cDNA molecules can thereafter be replicated using molecular biology techniques known in the art and disclosed in manuals such as Sambrook et al. (1989). An amplification technique, such as PCR, can be used to obtain additional copies of polynucleotides of the invention, using either human genomic DNA or cDNA as a template.
  • PCR-based methods can be used to extend the nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein to detect upstream sequences such as promoters and regulatory elements.
  • restriction-site PCR uses universal primers to retrieve unknown sequence adjacent to a known locus (Sarkar, PCR Methods Applic. 2, 318-322, 1993). Genomic DNA is first amplified in the presence of a primer to a linker sequence and a primer specific to the known region. The amplified sequences are then subjected to a second round of PCR with the same linker primer and another specific primer internal to the first one. Products of each round of PCR are transcribed with an appropriate RNA polymerase and sequenced using reverse transcriptase.
  • Inverse PCR also can be used to amplify or extend sequences using divergent primers based on a known region (Triglia et al, Nucleic Acids Res. 16, 8186, 1988). Primers can be designed using commercially available software, such as OLIGO 4.06 Primer
  • the method uses several restriction enzymes to generate a suitable fragment in the known region of a gene. The fragment is then circularized by intramolecular ligation and used as a PCR template.
  • capture PCR involves PCR amplification of DNA fragments adjacent to a known sequence in human and yeast artificial chromosome DNA (Lagerstrom et al, PCR Methods Applic. 1, 111-119, 1991).
  • multiple restriction enzyme digestions and ligations also can be used to place an engineered double-stranded sequence into an unknown fragment of the DNA molecule before performing PCR.
  • Randomly-primed libraries are preferable, in that they will contain more sequences which contain the 5' regions of genes. Use of a randomly primed library may be especially preferable for situations in which an oligo d(T) library does not yield a full-length cDNA. Genomic libraries can be useful for extension of sequence into 5' non-transcribed regulatory regions.
  • capillary electrophoresis systems can be used to analyze the size or confirm the nucleotide sequence of PCR or sequencing products.
  • capillary sequencing can employ flowable polymers for electrophoretic separation, four different fluorescent dyes (one for each nucleotide) that are laser activated, and detection of the emitted wavelengths by a charge coupled device camera.
  • Output/light intensity can be converted to electrical signal using appropriate software (e.g. GENOTYPER and Sequence NAVIGATOR, Perkin Elmer), and the entire process from loading of samples to computer analysis and electronic data display can be computer controlled.
  • Capillary electrophoresis is especially preferable for the sequencing of small pieces of DNA that might be present in limited amounts in a particular sample.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be obtained, for example, by purification from - human cells, by expression of neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides, or by direct chemical synthesis. Protein purification
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be purified from any human cell which expresses the receptor, including host cells which have been transfected with neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides.
  • a purified neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is separated from other compounds that normally associate with the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide in the cell, such as certain proteins, carbohydrates, or lipids, using methods well-known in the art. Such methods include, but are not limited to, size exclusion chromatography, ammonium sulfate fractionation, ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, and preparative gel electrophoresis.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be conveniently isolated as a complex with its associated G protein, as described in the specific examples, below.
  • a preparation of purified neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides is at least 80% pure; preferably, the preparations are 90%), 95%, or 99%) pure. Purity of the preparations can be assessed by any means known in the art, such as SDS-poly- acrylamide gel electrophoresis.
  • the polynucleotide can be inserted into an expression vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence.
  • Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing sequences encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides and appropriate transcriptional and translational control elements. These methods include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. Such techniques are described, for example, in Sambrook et al. (1989) and in Ausubel et al, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, New York, N.Y, 1989.
  • a variety of expression vector/host systems can be utilized to contain and express sequences encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors; yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors, insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus), plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; ' ⁇ tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or with bacterial expression vectors (e.g., Ti or pBR322 plasmids), or animal cell systems.
  • microorganisms such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors
  • yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus), plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV;
  • control elements or regulatory sequences are those non-translated regions of the vector — enhancers, promoters, 5' and 3' untranslated regions — which interact with host cellular proteins to carry out transcription and translation. Such elements can vary iri their strength and specificity. Depending on the vector system and host utilized, any number of suitable transcription and translation elements, including constitutive and inducible promoters, can be used. For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the BLUESCRIPT phagemid (Stratagene, LaJolla, Calif.) or pSPORTl plasmid (Life Technologies) and the like can be used. The baculovirus polyhedrin promoter can be used in insect cells.
  • Promoters or enhancers derived from the genomes of plant cells e.g., heat shock, RUBISCO, and storage protein genes
  • plant viruses e.g., viral promoters or leader sequences
  • promoters from mammalian genes or from mammalian viruses are preferable. If it is necessary to generate a cell line that contains multiple copies of a nucleotide sequence encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, vectors based on SV40 or EBV can be used with an appropriate selectable marker.
  • Bacterial and yeast expression systems e.g., Bacterial and yeast expression systems
  • a number of expression vectors can be selected depending upon the use intended for the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. For example, when a large quantity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is needed for the induction of antibodies, vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified can be used. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as BLUES CREPT (Stratagene).
  • a sequence encoding the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be ligated into the vector in frame with sequences for the amino-terminal Met and the subsequent 7 residues of ⁇ -galactosidase so that a hybrid protein is produced.
  • pIN vectors Van Heeke & Schuster, J Biol Chem. 264, 5503-5509, 1989
  • pGEX vectors Promega, Madison, Wis.
  • GST glutathione S-transferase
  • fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption to glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione.
  • Proteins made in such systems can be designed to include heparin, thrombin, or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned polypeptide of interest can be released from the GST moiety at will.
  • yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae a number of vectors containing constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and PGH can be used.
  • constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and PGH.
  • sequences encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be driven by any of a number of promoters.
  • viral promoters such as the 35S and 19S promoters of CaMV can be used alone or in combination with the omega leader sequence from TMV (Takamatsu, EMBO J. 6, 307-311, 1987).
  • plant promoters such as the small subunit of RUBISCO or heat shock promoters can be used (Coruzzi et al, EMBO J. 3, 1671-1680, 1984; Broglie et al, Science 224, 838-843, 1984; Winter et al, Results Probl. Cell Differ. 17, 85-105, 1991).
  • These constructs can be introduced into plant cells by direct DNA transformation or by pathogen-mediated transfection.
  • An insect system also can be used to express a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes in Spodoptera frugiperda cells or in Trichoplusia larvae.
  • Sequences encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be cloned into a non-essential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the polyhedrin promoter.
  • Successful insertion of neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides will render the polyhedrin gene inactive and produce recombinant virus lacking coat protein.
  • the recombinant viruses can then be used to infect S. frugiperda cells or Trichoplusia larvae in which neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be expressed (Engelhard et al, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 91, 3224-3227, 1994).
  • a number of viral-based expression systems can be used to express neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides in mammalian host cells.
  • sequences encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex comprising the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a non-essential El or E3 region of the viral genome can be used to obtain a viable virus which is capable of expressing a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide in infected host cells (Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 81, 3655-3659, 1984).
  • transcription enhancers such as the Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) enhancer, can be used to increase expression in mammalian host cells.
  • RSV Rous sarcoma virus
  • HACs Human artificial chromosomes
  • 6M to 10M are constructed and delivered to cells via conventional delivery methods (e.g., liposomes, polycationic amino polymers, or vesicles).
  • Specific initiation signals also can be used to achieve more efficient translation of sequences encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides. Such signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where sequences encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, its initiation codon, and upstream sequences are inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional transcriptional or translational control signals may be needed. However, in cases where only coding sequence, or a fragment thereof, is inserted, exogenous translational control signals (including the ATG initiation codon) should be provided.
  • the initiation codon should be in the correct reading frame to ensure translation of the entire insert. Exogenous translational elements and initiation codons can be of various origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression can be enhanced by the inclusion of enhancers which are appropriate for the particular cell system which is used (see Scharf et al, Results Probl Cell Differ. 20, 125-162,
  • a host cell strain can be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide in the desired fashion.
  • modifications of the polypeptide include, but are not limited to, acetylation, carboxylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation, and acylation.
  • Post-translational processing which cleaves a "prepro" form of the polypeptide also can be used to facilitate correct insertion, folding and/or function.
  • Different host cells that have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for post-translational activities e.g., CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293, and WI38
  • ATCC American Type Culture Collection
  • Stable expression is preferred for long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins.
  • cell lines which stably express neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be transformed using expression vectors which can contain viral origins of replication and/or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene on the same or on a separate vector. Following the introduction of the vector, cells can be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched medium before they are switched to a selective medium.
  • the purpose of the selectable marker is to confer resistance to selection, and its presence allows growth and recovery of cells that successfully express the introduced neurotransmitter transporter sequences.
  • Resistant clones of stably transformed cells can be proliferated using tissue culture .techniques appropriate to the cell type. See, for example, ANIMAL CELL CULTURE, R.I. Freshney, ed., 1986.
  • herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al., Cell 11, 223-32, 1977) and adenine phosphoribosyl ⁇ ransferase (Lowy et al., Cell 22, 817-23, 1980) genes that can be employed in tk " or aprf cells, respectively.
  • antimetabolite, antibiotic, or herbicide resistance can be used as the basis for selection.
  • dhfr confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci.
  • npt confers resistance to the aminoglycosides, neomycin and G-418 (Colbere-Garapin et al, J. Mol Biol 150, 1-14, 1981), and als and pat confer resistance to chlorsulfuron and phosphinotricin acetyltransferase, respectively (Murray, 1992, supra). Additional selectable genes have been described. For example, trpB allows cells to utilize indole in place of tryptophan, or hisD, which allows cells to utilize histinol in place of histidine (Hartman & Mulligan, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 85, 8047-51, 1988).
  • Visible markers such as anthocyanins, ⁇ -glucuronidase and its substrate GUS, and luciferase and its substrate luciferin, can be used to identify transformants and to quantify the amount of transient or stable protein expression attributable to a specific vector system (Rhodes et al, Methods Mol. Biol. 55, 121-131, 1995).
  • marker gene expression suggests that the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide is also present, its presence and expression may need to be confirmed. For example, if a sequence encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is inserted within a marker gene sequence, transformed cells containing sequences which encode an neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be identified by the absence of marker gene function. Alternatively, a marker gene can be placed in tandem with a sequence encoding an neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide under the control of a single promoter. Expression of the marker gene in response to induction or selection usually indicates expression of the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide.
  • host cells which contain a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide and which express a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be identified by a variety of procedures known to those of skill in the art. These procedures include, but are not limited to, DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridizations and protein bioassay or immunoassay techniques that include membrane, solution, or chip-based technologies for the detection and/or quantification of nucleic acid or protein.
  • the presence of a polynucleotide sequence encoding an neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be detected by DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridization or amplification using probes or fragments or fragments of polynucleotides encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • Nucleic acid amplification-based assays involve the use of oligonucleotides selected from sequences encoding an neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide to detect transformants which contain an neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide.
  • a variety of protocols for detecting and measuring the expression of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, using either polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies specific for the polypeptide, are known in the art. Examples include enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), and fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS).
  • ELISA enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay
  • RIA radioimmunoassay
  • FACS fluorescence activated cell sorting
  • a two-site, monoclonal-based immunoassay using monoclonal antibodies reactive to two non-interfering epitopes on a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be used, or a competitive binding assay can be employed. These and other assays are described in Hampton et al, SEROLOGICAL METHODS: A LABORATORY MANUAL, APS Press, St. Paul, Minn, 1990) and Maddox et ⁇ /, J Exp. Med. 158,
  • Means for producing labeled hybridization or PCR probes for detecting sequences related to polynucleotides encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides include oligolabeling, nick translation, end-labeling, or PCR amplification using a labeled nucleotide.
  • sequences encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be cloned into a vector for the production of an mRNA probe.
  • RNA probes are known in the art, are commercially available, and can be used to synthesize RNA probes in vitro by addition of labeled nucleotides and an appropriate RNA polymerase such as T7, T3, or SP6. These procedures can be conducted using a variety of commercially available kits (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Promega, and US Biochemical). Suitable reporter molecules or labels which can be used for ease of detection include radionuclides, enzymes, and fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or chromogenic agents, as well as substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, magnetic particles, and the like. Expression and purification of polypeptides
  • Host cells transformed with nucleotide sequences encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the protein from cell culture.
  • the polypeptide produced by a transformed cell can be secreted or contained intracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used.
  • expression vectors containing polynucleotides which encode neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be designed to contain signal sequences which direct secretion of soluble neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane or which direct the membrane insertion of membrane- bound neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • purification facilitating domains include, but are not limited to, metal chelating peptides such as histidine-tryptophan modules that allow purification on immobilized . metals, protein A domains that allow purification on immobilized immunoglobulin, and the domain utilized in the FLAGS extension/affinity purification system
  • cleavable linker sequences such as those specific for Factor Xa or enterokinase (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) between the purification domain and the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide also can be used
  • One such expression vector provides for expression of a fusion protein containing a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide and 6 histidine residues preceding a thioredoxin or an enterokinase cleavage site.
  • the histidine residues facilitate purification by IMAC (immobilized metal ion affinity chromatography, as described in Porath et al., Prot. Exp. Purifi 3, 263-281, 1992), while the enterokinase cleavage site provides a means for purifying the neuro- ' transmitter transporter polypeptide from the fusion protein.
  • Vectors that contain fusion proteins are disclosed in Kroll et al, DNA Cell Biol 12, 441-453, 1993. Chemical synthesis
  • Sequences encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be synthesized, in whole or in part, using chemical methods well known in the art (see
  • a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide itself can be produced using chemical methods to synthesize its amino acid sequence, such as by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques (Merrifield, J Am. Chem. Soc. 85, 2149-2154, 1963; Roberge et al, Science 269,
  • Protein synthesis can be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis ' can be achieved, for example, using Applied Biosystems 431 A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer).
  • fragments of neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be separately synthesized and combined using chemical methods to produce a full-length molecule.
  • the newly synthesized peptide can be substantially purified by preparative high performance liquid chromatography (e.g., Creighton, PROTEINS: STRUCTURES AND MOLECULAR PRINCIPLES, WH Freeman and Co, New York, N.Y, 1983).
  • the composition of a synthetic neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be confirmed by amino acid analysis or sequencing (e.g., the Edman degradation procedure; see Creighton, supra). Additionally, any portion of the amino acid sequence of the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be altered during direct synthesis and/or combined using chemical methods with sequences from other proteins to produce a variant polypeptide or a fusion protein.
  • codons preferred by a particular prokaryotic or eukaryotic host can be selected to increase the rate of protein expression or to produce an RNA transcript having desirable properties, such as a half-life which is longer than that of a transcript generated from the naturally occurring sequence.
  • nucleotide sequences disclosed herein can be engineered using methods generally known in the art to alter neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide-encoding sequences for a variety of reasons, including but not limited to, alterations which modify the cloning, processing, and/or expression of the polypeptide or mRNA product.
  • DNA shuffling by random fragmentation and PCR reassembly of gene fragments and synthetic oligonucleotides can be used to engineer the nucleotide sequences.
  • site-directed mutagenesis can be used to insert new restriction sites, alter glycosylation patterns, change codon preference, produce splice variants, introduce mutations, and so forth.
  • Antibody as used herein includes intact immunoglobulin molecules, as well as fragments thereof, such as Fab, F(ab') 2 , and Fv, which are capable of binding an epitope of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • Fab fragment antigen binding protein
  • F(ab') 2 fragment antigen binding protein
  • Fv fragment antigen binding protein
  • epitopes which involve non-contiguous amino acids may require more, e.g., at least 15, 25, or 50 amino acids.
  • An antibody which specifically binds to an epitope of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be used therapeutically, as well as in immunochemical assays, such as Western blots, ELISAs, radiqimmunoassays, immunohistochemical assays, immunoprecipitations, or other immunochemical assays known in the art.
  • immunochemical assays such as Western blots, ELISAs, radiqimmunoassays, immunohistochemical assays, immunoprecipitations, or other immunochemical assays known in the art.
  • Various immunoassays can be used to identify antibodies having the desired specificity. Numerous protocols for competitive binding or immunoradiometric assays are well known in the art. Such immunoassays typically involve the measurement of complex formation between an immunogen and an antibody that specifically binds to the immunogen.
  • an antibody that specifically binds to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide provides a detection signal at least 5-, 10-, or 20-fold higher than a detection signal provided with other proteins when used in an immunochemical assay.
  • antibodies that specifically bind to neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides do not detect other proteins in immunochemical assays and can immunoprecipitate a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide from solution.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be used to immunize a mammal, such as a mouse, rat, rabbit, guinea pig, monkey, or human, to produce polyclonal antibodies.
  • a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be conjugated to a carrier protein, such as bovine serum albumin, thyroglobulin, and keyhole limpet hemocyanin.
  • a carrier protein such as bovine serum albumin, thyroglobulin, and keyhole limpet hemocyanin.
  • various adjuvants can be used to increase the immunological response.
  • adjuvants include, but are not limited to, Freund's adjuvant, mineral gels (e.g., aluminum hydroxide), and surface active substances (e.g.
  • BCG Bacilli Calmette-Guerin
  • Corynebacterium parvum are especially useful. .
  • Monoclonal antibodies that specifically bind to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be prepared using any technique which provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture. These techniques include, but are not limited to, the hybridoma technique, the human B-cell hybridoma technique, and the EBV-hybridoma technique (Kohler et al, Nature 256, 495-497, 1985; Kozbor et al, J. Immunol. Methods 81, 31-42, 1985; Cote et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 80, 2026-2030, 1983; Cole et al, Mol. Cell Biol 62, 109-120, 1984).
  • chimeric antibodies the splicing of mouse antibody genes to human antibody genes to obtain a molecule with appropriate antigen specificity and biological activity, can be used (Morrison et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 81, 6851-6855, 1984; Neuberger et al, Nature 312, 604-608, 1984; Takeda et al, Nature 314, 452-454, 1985).
  • Monoclonal and other antibodies also can be "humanized” to prevent a patient from mounting an immune response against the antibody when it is used therapeutically. Such antibodies may be sufficiently similar in sequence to human antibodies to be used directly in therapy or may require alteration of a few key residues.
  • rodent antibodies and human sequences can be minimized by replacing residues which differ from those in the human sequences by site directed mutagenesis of individual residues or by grating of entire complementarity determimng regions.
  • humanized antibodies can be produced using recombinant methods, as described in GB2188638B.
  • Antibodies that specifically bind to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can contain antigen binding sites which are either partially or fully humanized, as disclosed in U.S. 5,565,332.
  • single chain antibodies can be adapted using methods known in the art to produce single chain antibodies that specifically bind to neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides.
  • Antibodies with related specificity, but of distinct idiotypic composition can be generated by chain shuffling from random combinatorial immunoglobin libraries (Burton, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 88, 11120-23, 1991).
  • Single-chain antibodies also can be constructed using a DNA amplification method, such as PCR, using hybridoma cDNA as a template (Thirion et al, 1996, Eur. J. Cancer Prev. 5, 507-11).
  • Single-chain antibodies can be mono- or bispecific, and can be bivalent or tetravalent. Construction of tetravalent, bispecific single-chain antibodies is taught, for example, in Coloma & Morrison, 1997, Nat. Biotechnol. 15, 159-63. Construction of bivalent, bispecific single-chain antibodies is taught in
  • a nucleotide sequence encoding a single-chain antibody can be constructed using manual or automated nucleotide synthesis, cloned into an expression construct using standard recombinant DNA methods, and introduced into a cell to express the coding sequence, as described below.
  • single-chain antibodies can be produced directly using, for example, filamentous phage technology (Verhaar et al, 1995, Int. J. Cancer 61, 497-501; Nicholls et al, 1993, J Immunol. Meth. 165, 81- 91).
  • Antibodies which specifically bind to neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides also can be produced by inducing in vivo production in the lymphocyte population or by screening immunoglobulin libraries or panels of highly specific binding reagents as disclosed in the literature (Orlandi et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 86, 3833-3837, 1989; Winter et al, Nature 349, 293-299, 1991).
  • chimeric antibodies can be constructed as disclosed in WO 93/03151.
  • Binding proteins which are derived from immunoglobulins and which are multivalent and multispecific, such as the "diabodies" described in WO 94/13804, also can be prepared.
  • Antibodies according to the invention can be purified by methods well known in the art. For example, antibodies can be affinity purified by passage over a column to which a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is bound. The bound antibodies can then be eluted from the column using a buffer with a high salt concentration.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides are nucleotide sequences that are complementary to a specific DNA or RNA sequence. Once introduced into a cell, the complementary nucleotides combine with natural sequences produced by the cell to form complexes and block either transcription or translation. Preferably, an antisense oligonucleotide is at least 11 nucleotides in length, but can be at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 or more nucleotides long. Longer sequences also can be used. Antisense oligonucleotide molecules can be provided in a DNA construct and introduced into a cell as described above to decrease the level of neurotransmitter transporter gene products in the cell.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides can be deoxyribonucleotides, ribonucleotides, or a combination of both. Oligonucleotides can be synthesized manually or by an automated synthesizer, by covalently linking the 5 ' end of one nucleotide with the 3 ' end of another nucleotide with non-phosphodiester internucleotide linkages such alkylphosphonates, phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, alkylphosphonothipates, alkylphosphonates, phosphoramidates, phosphate esters, carbamates, acetamidate, carboxymethyl esters, carbonates, and phosphate triesters. See Brown, Meth. Mol
  • Modifications of neurotransmitter transporter gene expression can be obtained by designing antisense oligonucleotides that will form duplexes to the control, 5', or regulatory regions of the neurotransmitter transporter gene. Oligonucleotides derived from the transcription initiation site, e.g., between positions -10 and +10 from the start site, are preferred. Similarly, inhibition can be achieved using "triple helix" base-pairing methodology. Triple helix pairing is useful because it causes inhibition of the ability of the double helix to open sufficiently for the binding of polymerases, transcription factors, or chaperons. Therapeutic advances using triplex DNA have been described in the literature (e.g., Gee et al, in Huber & Carr, MOLECULAR AND
  • An antisense oligonucleotide also can be designed to block translation of mRNA by preventing the transcript from binding to ribosomes. Precise complementarity is not required for successful complex formation between an antisense oligonucleotide and the complementary sequence of a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides which comprise, for example, 2, 3, 4, or 5 or more stretches of contiguous nucleotides which are precisely complementary to an neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide, .
  • each separated by a stretch of contiguous nucleotides which are not complementary to adjacent neurotransmitter transporter nucleotides can provide sufficient targeting specificity for neurotransmitter transporter mRNA.
  • each stretch of complementary contiguous nucleotides is at least 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 or more nucleotides in length.
  • Non-complementary intervening sequences are preferably 1, 2, 3, or 4 nucleotides in length.
  • One skilled in the art can easily use the calculated melting point of an antisense-sense pair to determine the degree of mismatching which will be tolerated between a particular antisense oligonucleotide and a particular neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide sequence.
  • Antisense oligonucleotides can be modified without affecting their ability to hybridize to a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide. These modifications can be internal or at one or both ends of the antisense molecule. For example, inter- nucleoside phosphate linkages can be- modified by adding cholesteryl or diamine moieties with varying numbers of carbon residues between the amino groups and terminal ribose.
  • Modified bases and/or sugars such as arabinose instead of ribose, or a 3', 5 '-substituted oligonucleotide in which the 3' hydroxyl group or the 5' phosphate group are substituted, also can be employed in a modified antisense oligonucleotide.
  • modified oligonucleotides can be prepared by methods well known in the art. See, e.g., Agrawal et al, Trends Biotechnol 10, 152-158, 1992;
  • Ribozymes are RNA molecules with catalytic activity. See, e.g., Cech, Science 236, 1532-1539; 1987; Cech, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 59, 543-568; 1 ' 990, Cech, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol 2, 605-609; 1992, Couture & Stinchcomb, Trends Genet. 12, 510-515,
  • Ribozymes can be used to inhibit gene function by cleaving an RNA sequence, as is known in the art (e.g., Haseloff et al, U.S. Patent 5,641,673).
  • the mechanism of ribozyme action involves sequence-specific hybridization of the ribozyme molecule to complementary target RNA, followed by endonucleolytic cleavage. Examples include engineered hammerhead motif ribozyme molecules that can specifically and efficiently catalyze endonucleolytic cleavage of specific nucleotide sequences.
  • the coding sequence of a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be used to generate ribozymes that will specifically bind to mRNA transcribed from the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide.
  • Methods of designing and constructing ribozymes which can cleave other RNA molecules in trans in a highly sequence specific manner have been developed and described in the art (see Haseloff et al. Nature 334, 585-591, 1988).
  • the cleavage activity of ribozymes can be targeted to specific RNAs by engineering a discrete "hybridization" region into the ribozyme.
  • the hybridization region contains a sequence complementary to the target RNA and thus specifically hybridizes with the target (see, for example, Gerlach et al, EP 321,201).
  • Specific ribozyme cleavage sites within a human neurotransmitter transporter RNA target can be identified by scanning the target molecule for ribozyme cleavage sites which include the following sequences: GUA, GUU, and GUC. Once identified, short RNA sequences of between 15 and 20 ribonucleotides corresponding to the region of the target RNA containing the cleavage site can be evaluated for secondary structural features which may render the target inoperable. Suitability of candidate neurotransmitter transporter RNA targets also can be evaluated by testing accessibility to hybridization with complementary oligonucleotides using ribo- nuclease protection assays. Longer complementary sequences can be used to increase the affinity of the hybridization sequence for the target. The hybridizing and cleavage regions of the ribozyme can be integrally related such that upon hybridizing to the target RNA through the complementary regions, the catalytic region of the ribozyme can cleave the target.
  • Ribozymes can be introduced into cells as part of a DNA construct. Mechanical methods, such as microinjection, liposome-mediated transfection, electroporation, or calcium phosphate precipitation, can be used to introduce a ribozyme-containing DNA construct.
  • a ribozyme-encoding DNA construct can include transcriptional regulatory elements, such as a promoter element, an enhancer or UAS element, and a transcriptional terminator signal, for controlling transcription of ribozymes in the cells.
  • ribozymes can be engineered so that ribozyme expression will occur in response to factors that induce expression of a target gene. Ribozymes also can be engineered to provide an additional level of regulation, so that destruction of mRNA occurs only when both a ribozyme and a target gene are induced in the cells.
  • genes whose products interact with human neurotransmitter transporter may represent genes that are differentially expressed in disorders including, but not limited to, CNS disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, genitourological disorders, cancer, hematological disorders, cardiovascular disorders, COPD, and asthma. Further, such genes may represent genes that are differentially regulated in response to manipulations relevant to the progression or treatment of such diseases. Additionally, such genes may have • a temporally modulated expression, increased or decreased at different stages of tissue or organism development. A differentially expressed gene may also have its expression modulated under control versus experimental conditions. In addition, the human neurotransmitter transporter gene or gene product may itself be tested for differential expression.
  • the degree to which expression differs in a normal versus a diseased state need only be large enough to be visualized via standard characterization techniques such as differential display techniques.
  • standard characterization techniques such as differential display techniques.
  • Other such standard characterization techniques by which expression differences may be visualized include but are not limited to, quantitative RT (reverse transcriptase), PCR, and Northern analysis.
  • RNA samples are obtained from tissues of experimental subjects and from corresponding tissues of control subjects. Any RNA isolation technique that does not select against the isolation of mRNA may be utilized for the purification of such RNA samples. See, for example, Ausubel et al, ed, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • tissue samples may readily be processed using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such as, for example, the single-step RNA isolation process of Chomczynski, U.S. Patent 4,843,155.
  • Transcripts within the collected RNA samples that represent RNA produced by differentially expressed genes are identified by methods well known to those of skill in the art. They include, for example, differential screening (Tedder et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85, 208-12, 1988), subtractive hybridization (Hedrick et al, Nature 308, 149-53; Lee et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 88, 2825, 1984), and, preferably, differential display (Liang & Pardee, Science 257, 967-71, 1992; U.S.
  • the differential expression information may itself suggest relevant methods for the treatment of disorders involving the human neurotransmitter transporter.
  • treatment may include a modulation of expression of the differentially expressed genes and/or the gene encoding the human neurotransmitter transporter.
  • the differential expression information may indicate whether the expression or activity of the differentially expressed gene or gene product or the human neurotransmitter transporter gene or gene product are up-regulated or down-regulated.
  • the invention provides assays for screening test compounds that bind to or modulate the activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide.
  • a test compound preferably binds to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or polynucleotide. More preferably, a test compound decreases or increases functional activity by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100%> relative to the absence of the test compound.
  • Test compounds can be pharmacologic agents already known in the art or can be compounds previously unknown to have any pharmacological activity.
  • the compoimds can be naturally occurring or designed in the laboratory. They can be isolated from microorganisms, animals, or plants, and can be produced recombinantly, or synthesized by chemical methods known in the art. If desired, test compounds can be obtained using any of the numerous combinatorial library methods known in the art, including but not limited to, biological libraries, spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries, synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution, the "one-bead one-compound” library method, and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection.
  • the biological library approach is limited to polypeptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to polypeptide, non-peptide oligomer, or small molecule libraries of compounds. See Lam, Anticancer Drug Des. 12, 145, 1997.
  • Test compounds can be screened for the ability to bind to neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides or polynucleotides or to affect neurotransmitter transporter activity or neurotransmitter transporter gene expression using high throughput screening.
  • high throughput screening many discrete compounds can be tested in parallel so that large numbers of test compounds can be quickly screened.
  • the most widely established techniques utilize 96-well microtiter plates. The wells of the microtiter plates typically require assay volumes that range from 50 to 500 ⁇ l.
  • many instruments, materials, pipettors, robotics, plate washers, and plate readers are commercially available to fit the 96-well format.
  • free format assays or assays that have no physical barrier between samples, can be used.
  • an assay using pigment cells (melanocytes) in a simple homogeneous assay for combinatorial peptide libraries is described by Jayawickreme et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 19, 1614-18 (1994).
  • the cells are placed under agarose in petri dishes, and then beads that carry combinatorial compounds are placed on the surface of the agarose.
  • the combinatorial compounds are partially released the compounds from the beads. Active compounds can be visualized as dark pigment areas because, as the compounds diffuse locally into the gel matrix, the active compounds cause the cells to change colors.
  • Chelsky "Strategies for Screening Combinatorial Libraries: Novel and Traditional Approaches," reported at the First Annual Conference of The Society for Biomolecular Screening in Philadelphia, Pa. (Nov. 7-10, 1995).
  • Chelsky placed a simple homogenous enzyme assay for carbonic anhydrase inside an agarose gel such that the enzyme in the gel would cause a color change throughout the gel.
  • beads carrying combinatorial compounds via a photo linker were placed inside the gel and the compounds were partially released by UV-light. Compounds that inhibited the enzyme were observed as local zones of inhibition having less color change.
  • test samples are placed in a porous matrix.
  • One or more • assay components are then placed within, on top of, or at the bottom of a matrix such as a gel, a plastic sheet, a filter, or other form of easily manipulated solid support.
  • a matrix such as a gel, a plastic sheet, a filter, or other form of easily manipulated solid support.
  • the test compound is preferably a small molecule that binds to the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, such that normal biological activity is prevented.
  • small molecules include, but are not limited to, small peptides or peptide-like molecules.
  • either the test compound or the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can comprise a detectable label, such as a fluorescent, radioisotopic, chemiluminescent, or enzymatic label, such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase.
  • a detectable label such as a fluorescent, radioisotopic, chemiluminescent, or enzymatic label, such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase.
  • Detection of a test compound that is bound to the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can then be accomplished, for example, by direct counting of radioemmission, by scintillation counting, or by determining conversion of an appropriate substrate to a detectable product.
  • binding of a test compound to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be determined without labeling either of the interactants.
  • a microphysiometer can be used to detect binding of a test compound with a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • a microphysiometer e.g., CytosensorTM
  • a microphysiometer is an analytical instrument that measures the rate at which a cell acidifies its environment using a light-addressable potentiometric sensor (LAPS). Changes in this acidification rate can be used as an indicator of the interaction between a test compound and a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (McConnell et al, Science 257, 1906-1912, 1992).
  • Determining the ability of a test compound to bind to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide also can be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Bimolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (Sjolander & Urbaniczky, Anal Chem. 63, 2338-2345, 1991, and Szabo et al., Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5, 699-705, 1995).
  • BIA is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcoreTM). Changes in the optical phenomenon surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
  • a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be used as a "bait protein" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,283,317; Zervos et al, Cell 72, 223-232, 1993; Madura et al, J Biol. Chem. 268, 12046-12054, 1993; Bartel et al, BioTechniques 14, 920-924, 1993; Iwabuchi et al, Oncogene 8, 1693-1696, 1993; and Brent W094/10300), to identify other proteins which bind to or interact with the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide and modulate its activity.
  • the two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains.
  • the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs.
  • polynucleotide encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be fused to a polynucleotide encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g., GAL-4).
  • a DNA sequence that encodes an unidentified protein (“prey” or "sample” can be fused to a polynucleotide that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor. If the "bait" and the "prey” proteins are able to interact in vivo to form an protein-dependent complex, the
  • DNA-binding and activation domains of the transcription factor are brought into close proximity. This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g., LacZ), which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor. Expression of the reporter gene can be detected, and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the reporter gene.
  • a reporter gene e.g., LacZ
  • DNA sequence encoding the protein that interacts with the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is provided.
  • neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or polynucleotide
  • test compound may be desirable to immobilize either the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or the test compound to facilitate separation of bound from unbound forms of one or both of the interactants, as well as to accommodate 3/059947
  • either the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or the test compound can be bound to a solid support.
  • suitable solid supports include, but are. not limited to, glass or plastic slides, tissue culture plates, microtiter wells, tubes, silicon chips, or particles such as beads (including, but not limited to, latex, polystyrene, or glass beads). Any method known in the art can be used to attach the polypeptide (or polynucleotide) of test compound to a solid support, including use of covalent and non-covalent linkages, passive abso ⁇ tion, or pairs of binding moieties attached respectively to the polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or test compound and the solid support.
  • Test compounds are preferably bound to the solid support in an array, so that the location of individual test compounds can be tracked. Binding of a test compound to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (or polynucleotide) can be accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants. Examples of such vessels include microtiter plates, test tubes, and microcentrifuge tubes.
  • the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is a fusion protein comprising a domain that allows the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide to be bound to a solid support.
  • glutathione-S-transferase fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, Mo.) or glutathione derivatized microtiter plates, which are then combined with the test compound or the test compound and the non-adsorbed neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide; the mixture is then incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads or microtiter plate wells are washed to remove any unbound components. Binding of the interactants can be determined either directly or indirectly, as described above. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the solid support before binding is determined.
  • a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or a test compound can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin.
  • Biotinylated neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides (or polynucleotides) or test compounds can be prepared from biotin-NHS(N- hydroxysuccinimide) using techniques well known in the art (e.g. , biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, 111.) and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical).
  • antibodies which specifically bind to a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, polynucleotide, or a test compound, but which do not interfere with a desired binding site can be derivatized to the wells of the plate. Unbound target or protein can be trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation.
  • Methods for detecting such complexes include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies which specifically bind to the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or test compound, enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an activity of the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, and SDS gel electrophoresis under non- reducing conditions.
  • Screening for test compounds which bind to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or polynucleotide also can be carried out in an intact cell. Any cell which comprises a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system. A neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above. Binding of the test compound to a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or polynucleotide is determined as described above.
  • Test compounds can be tested for the ability to increase or decrease the functional activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. Functional activity can be assessed, for example, by measuring neurotransmitter activity, as is known in the art. Functional assays can be carried out after contacting either a purified neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, a cell membrane preparation, or an intact cell with a test compound. A test compound that decreases functional activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about
  • a test compound which increases functional activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for increasing human neurotransmitter transporter activity.
  • test compounds that increase or decrease neurotransmitter transporter gene expression are identified.
  • a neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide is contacted with a test compound, and the expression of an RNA or polypeptide product of the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide is determined.
  • the level of expression of appropriate mRNA or polypeptide in the presence of the test compound is compared to the level of expression of mRNA or polypeptide in the absence of the test compound.
  • the test compound can then be identified as a modulator of expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of mRNA or polypeptide is greater in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as a stimulator or enhancer of the mRNA or polypeptide expression. Alternatively, when expression of the mRNA or polypeptide is less in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of the mRNA or polypeptide expression.
  • the level of neurotransmitter transporter mRNA or polypeptide expression in the cells can be determined by methods well known in the art for detecting mRNA or polypeptide. Either qualitative or quantitative methods can be used.
  • the presence of polypeptide products of a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be determined, for example, using a variety of techniques known in the art, including immunochemical methods such as radioimmunoassay, Western blotting, and immunohistochemistry.
  • polypeptide synthesis can be determined in vivo, in a cell culture, or in an in vitro translation system by detecting incorporation of labeled amino acids into a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • Such screening can be carried out either in a cell-free assay system or in an intact cell.
  • Any cell that expresses a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system.
  • the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above.
  • Either a primary culture or an established cell line, such as CHO or human embryonic kidney 293 cells, can be used.
  • compositions of the invention can comprise, for example, a human neurotransmitter transporter poly- peptide, neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide, ribozymes or antisense oligonucleotides, antibodies which specifically bind to a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, or mimetics, activators, or inhibitors of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide activity.
  • the compositions can be administered alone or in combination with at least one other agent, such as stabilizing compound, which can be administered in any sterile, biocompatible pharmaceutical carrier, including, but not limited to, saline, buffered saline, dextrose, and water.
  • the compositions can be administered to a patient alone, or in combination with other agents, drugs or hormones.
  • compositions of the invention can be administered by any number of routes including, but not limited to, oral, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arterial, intramedullary, intrathecal, intraventricular, transdermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intranasal, parenteral, topical, sublingual, or rectal means.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions for oral administration can be formulated using pharmaceutically acceptable carriers well known in the art in dosages suitable for oral administration. Such carriers enable the pharmaceutical compositions to be formulated as tablets, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions, and the like, for ingestion by the patient.
  • compositions for oral use can be obtained through combination of active compounds with solid excipient, optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores.
  • Suitable excipients are carbohydrate or protein fillers, such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; starch from corn, wheat, rice, potato, or other plants; cellulose, such as methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, or sodium carboxymethylcellulose; gums including arabic and tragacanth; and proteins such as gelatin and collagen.
  • disintegrating or solubilizing agents can be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, alginic acid, or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
  • Dragee cores can be used in conjunction with suitable coatings, such as concentrated sugar solutions, which also can contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures.
  • suitable coatings such as concentrated sugar solutions, which also can contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures.
  • Dyestuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for product identification or to characterize the quantity of active compound, i.e., dosage.
  • compositions that can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a coating, such as glycerol or sorbitol.
  • Push-fit capsules can contain active ingredients mixed with a filler or binders, such as lactose or starches, lubricants, such as talc or magnesium stearate, and, optionally, stabilizers.
  • the active compounds can be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid, or liquid polyethylene glycol with or without stabilizers.
  • compositions suitable for parenteral administration can be formulated in aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks' solution, Ringer's solution, or physiologically buffered saline.
  • Aqueous injection suspensions can contain substances that increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran.
  • suspensions of the active compounds can be prepared as appropriate oily injection suspensions.
  • Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes.
  • Non-lipid polycationic amino polymers also can be used for delivery.
  • the suspension also can contain suitable stabilizers or agents that increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions.
  • penetrants appropriate to the particular barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
  • compositions of the present invention can be manufactured in a manner that is known in the art, e.g., by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making, levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping, or lyophilizing processes.
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be provided as a salt and can be formed with many acids, including but not limited to, hydrochloric, , sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free base forms.
  • the preferred preparation can be a lyophilized powder which can contain any or all of the following: 1-50 mM histidine, 0.1%-2% sucrose, and 2-7% mannitol, at a pH range of 4.5 to 5.5, that is combined with buffer prior to use. Further details on techniques for formulation and administration can be found in the latest edition of REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES (Maack Publishing Co, Easton, Pa.). After pharmaceutical compositions have been prepared, they can be placed in an appropriate container and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition. Such labeling would include amount, frequency, and method of administration.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter can be regulated to treat CNS disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, genitourological disorders, cancer, hematological disorders, cardiovascular disorders, COPD, and asthma.
  • the novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following brain tissues: substantia nigra, temporal lobe, cerebral cortex, parietal lobe, cerebral peduncles, hippocampus, vermis cerebelli, precentral gyrus, occipital lobe, Alzheimer cerebral cortex, Alzheimer brain frontal lobe, tonsilla cerebelli, brain, frontal lobe, cerebellum (left), cerebellum (right), pons, thalamus, Alzheimer brain, corpus callosum, dorsal root ganglia, retina.
  • the expression in brain tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue Alzheimer cerebral cortex and healthy tissue cerebral cortex, between diseased tissue Alzheimer brain frontal lobe and healthy tissue frontal lobe, between diseased tissue Alzheimer brain and healthy tissue brain demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to. diagnose nervous system diseases. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat nervous system diseases. Central and peripheral nervous system disorders also can be treated, such as primary ft and secondary disorders after brain injury, disorders of mood, anxiety disorders, disorders of thought and volition, disorders of sleep and wakefulness, diseases of the motor unit, such as neurogenic and myopathic disorders, neurodegenerative disorders such as Alzheimer's and Parkinson's disease, and processes of peripheral and chronic pain.
  • Pain that is associated with CNS disorders also can be treated by regulating the activity of human neurotransmitter transporter. Pain which can be treated includes that associated with central nervous system disorders, such as multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, sciatica, failed back surgery syndrome, traumatic brain injury, epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, post-stroke, and vascular lesions in the brain and spinal cord (e.g., infarct, hemorrhage, vascular malformation).
  • central nervous system disorders such as multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, sciatica, failed back surgery syndrome, traumatic brain injury, epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, post-stroke, and vascular lesions in the brain and spinal cord (e.g., infarct, hemorrhage, vascular malformation).
  • Non-central neuropathic pain includes that associated with post mastectomy pain, reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD), trigeminal neuralgiaradioculopathy, post-surgical pain, HIV/AIDS related pain, cancer pain, metabolic neuropathies (e.g., diabetic neuropathy, vasculitic neuropathy secondary to connective tissue disease), paraneoplastic polyneuropathy associated, for example, with carcinoma of lung, or leukemia, or lymphoma, or carcinoma of prostate, colon or stomach, trigeminal neuralgia, cranial neuralgias, and post-herpetic neuralgia. Pain associated with cancer and cancer treatment also can be treated, as can headache pain (for example, migraine with aura, migraine without aura, and other migraine disorders), episodic and chronic tension-type headache, tension-type like headache, cluster headache, and chronic paroxysmal hemicrania.
  • headache pain for example, migraine with aura, migraine without aura, and other migraine disorders
  • episodic and chronic tension-type headache tension-type like headache, cluster headache, and chronic par
  • the novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following tissues of the gastrointestinal system: rectum, stomach tumor, ileum, esophagus, ileum tumor, colon tumor, esophagus tumor, stomach, and colon.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue ileum tumor and healthy tissue ileum demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose gastrointestinal disorders. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat gastrointestinal disorders.
  • Gastrointestinal disorders comprise primary or secondary, acute or chronic diseases of the organs of the gastrointestinal tract which may be acquired or inherited, benign or malignant or metaplastic, and which may affect the organs of the gastrointestinal tract or the body as a whole. They include but are not limited to disorders of the esophagus, such as achalasia, vigoruos achalasia, dysphagia, cricopharyngeal incoordination, pre-esophageal dysphagia, diffuse esophageal spasm, globus sensation, Barrett's metaplasia, and gastroesophageal reflux.
  • disorders of the esophagus such as achalasia, vigoruos achalasia, dysphagia, cricopharyngeal incoordination, pre-esophageal dysphagia, diffuse esophageal spasm, globus sensation, Barrett's metaplasia, and gastroesophageal reflux.
  • stomachs include disorders of the stomach and duodenum, such as functional dyspepsia, inflammation of the gastric mucosa, gastritis, stress gastritis, chronic erosive gastritis, atrophy of gastric glands, metaplasia of gastric tissues, gastric ulcers, duodenal ulcers, and neoplasms of the stomach.
  • disorders of the stomach and duodenum such as functional dyspepsia, inflammation of the gastric mucosa, gastritis, stress gastritis, chronic erosive gastritis, atrophy of gastric glands, metaplasia of gastric tissues, gastric ulcers, duodenal ulcers, and neoplasms of the stomach.
  • Gastrointestinal disorders also include disorders of the pancreas, such as acute or chronic pancreatitis, insufficiency of the exocrinic or endocrinic tissues of the pancreas like steatorrhea, diabetes, neoplasms of the exocrine or endocrine pancreas (e.g., multiple endocrine neoplasia syndrome, ductal adenocarcinoma, cystadenocarcinoma, islet cell tumors, insulinoma, gastrinoma, carcinoid tumors, and glucagonoma), Zollinger-Ellison syndrome, Vipoma syndrome, and malabsorption . syndrome.
  • disorders of the pancreas such as acute or chronic pancreatitis, insufficiency of the exocrinic or endocrinic tissues of the pancreas like steatorrhea, diabetes, neoplasms of the exocrine or endocrine pancreas (e.g.
  • Gastrointestinal disorders also include disorders of the bowel, such as chronic inflammatory diseases of the bowel, Crohn's disease, ileus, diarrhea and constipation, colonic inertia, megacolon, malabsorption syndrome, and ulcerative colitis, functional bowel disorders, such as irritable bowel syndrome, neoplasms of the bowel, such as familial polyposis, adenocarcinoma, primary malignant lymphoma, carcinoid tumors, Kaposi's sarcoma, polyps, and cancer of the colon and rectum.
  • Genitourinary disorders such as chronic inflammatory diseases of the bowel, Crohn's disease, ileus, diarrhea and constipation, colonic inertia, megacolon, malabsorption syndrome, and ulcerative colitis
  • functional bowel disorders such as irritable bowel syndrome, neoplasms of the bowel, such as familial polyposis, adenocarcinoma, primary malignant lymphoma, carcino
  • the novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following tissues of the genitourinary system: ovary tumor, prostate BPH, penis, ureter, corpus cavernosum, ovary, and prostate.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue prostate BPH and healthy tissue prostate demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose genitourinary disorders. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat genitourinary disorders.
  • Genitourological disorders comprise benign and malign disorders of the organs constituting the genitourological system of female and male, renal diseases such as acute or chronic renal failure, immunologically mediated renal diseases such as renal transplant rejection, lupus nephritis, immune complex renal diseases, glomerulo- pathies, nephritis, toxic nephropathy, obstructive uropathies such as benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH), neurogenic bladder syndrome, urinary incontinence such as urge-, stress-, or overflow incontinence, pelvic pain, and erectile dysfunction.
  • renal diseases such as acute or chronic renal failure
  • immunologically mediated renal diseases such as renal transplant rejection, lupus nephritis, immune complex renal diseases, glomerulo- pathies, nephritis, toxic nephropathy, obstructive uropathies such as benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH), neurogenic bladder syndrome, urinary incontinence such as urge
  • Urinary Incontinence Urinary incontinence (UI) is the involuntary loss of urine.
  • Urge urinary incontinence is one of the most common types of UI together with stress urinary incontinence (SUE), which is usually caused by a defect in the urethral closure mechanism.
  • UUI is often associated with neurological disorders or diseases causing neuronal damage, such as dementia, Parkinson's disease, multiple sclerosis, stroke, and diabetes, although it also occurs in individuals with no such disorders.
  • One of the usual causes of UUI is overactive bladder (OAB), which is a medical condition referring to the symptoms of frequency and urgency derived from abnormal contractions and instability of the detrusor muscle.
  • Orally active anticholinergic drugs such as propantheline (ProBanthine), tolterodine tartrate (Detrol), and oxybutynin (Ditropan) are the most commonly prescribed drugs.
  • ProBanthine propantheline
  • Detrol tolterodine tartrate
  • oxybutynin oxybutynin
  • their most serious drawbacks are unacceptable side effects, such as dry mouth, abnormal visions, constipation, and central nervous system disturbances. These side effects lead to poor compliance. Dry mouth symptoms alone are responsible for a 70% non- compliance rate with oxybutynin.
  • the inadequacies of present therapies highlight the need for novel, efficacious, safe, orally available drugs that have fewer side effects.
  • the novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following cancer tissues: ovary tumor, lung tumor, thyroid tumor, stomach tumor, ileum tumor, colon tumor, esophagus tumor.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue lung tumor and healthy tissue lung, between diseased tissue thyroid tumor and healthy tissue thyroid, between diseased tissue stomach tumor and healthy tissue stomach, between diseased tissue colon tumor and healthy tissue colon, between diseased tissue esophagus tumor and healthy tissue esophagus demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose cancer. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat .cancer.
  • Cancer disorders within the scope of the invention comprise any disease of an organ or tissue in mammals characterized by poorly controlled or uncontrolled multipli- cation of normal or abnormal cells in that tissue and its effect on the body as a whole.
  • Cancer diseases within the scope of the invention comprise benign neoplasms, dysplasias, hyperplasias as well as neoplasms showing metastatic growth or any other transformations, e.g., leukoplakias, which often precede a breakout of cancer.
  • Cells and tissues are cancerous when they grow more rapidly than normal cells, displacing or spreading into the surrounding healthy tissue or any other tissues of the body described as metastatic growth, assume abnormal shapes and sizes, show changes in their nucleocytoplasmatic ratio, nuclear polychromasia, and finally may cease.
  • Cancerous cells and tissues may affect the body as a whole when causing paraneoplastic syndromes or if cancer occurs within a vital organ or tissue, normal function will be impaired or halted, with possible fatal results.
  • the ultimate involvement of a vital organ by cancer, either primary or metastatic, may lead to the death of the mammal affected. Cancer tends to spread, and the extent of its spread is usually related to an individual's chances of surviving the disease.
  • Cancers are generally said to be in one of three stages of growth: early, or localized, when a tumor is still confined to the tissue of origin, or primary site; direct extension, where cancer cells from the tumor have invaded adjacent tissue or have spread only to regional lymph nodes; or metastasis, in which cancer cells have migrated to distant parts of the body from the primary site, via the blood or lymph systems, and have established secondary sites of infection. Cancer is said to be malignant because of its tendency to cause death if not treated.
  • Benign tumors usually do not cause death, although they may if they interfere with a normal body function by virtue of their location, size, or paraneoplastic side effects. Hence, benign tumors fall under the definition of cancer within the scope of the invention as well.
  • cancer cells divide at a higher rate than do normal cells, but the distinction between the growth of cancerous and normal tissues is not so much the rapidity of cell division in the former as it is the partial or complete loss of growth restraint in cancer cells and their failure to differentiate into a useful, limited tissue of the type that characterizes the functional equilibrium of growth of normal tissue.
  • Cancer tissues may express certain molecular receptors and probably are influenced by the host's susceptibility and immunity and it is known that certain cancers of the breast and prostate, for example, are considered dependent on specific hormones for their existence.
  • the term "cancer” under the scope of the invention is not limited to simple benign neoplasia but includes any other benign and malign neoplasia, such as 1) carcinoma, 2) sarcoma, 3) carcinosarcoma, 4) cancers of the blood-forming tissues, 5) tumors of nerve tissues including the brain, and 6) cancer of skin cells.
  • Carcinoma occurs in epithelial tissues, which cover the outer body (the skin) and line mucous membranes and the inner cavitary structures of organs e.g. such as the breast, lung, the respiratory and gastrointestinal tracts, the endocrine glands, and the genitourinary system.
  • Ductal or glandular elements may persist in epithelial tumors, as in adenocarcinomas, e.g., thyroid adenocarcinoma, gastric adenocarcinoma, and uterine adenocarcinoma.
  • Cancers of the pavement-cell epithelium of the skin and of certain mucous membranes, such as cancers of the tongue, lip, larynx, urinary bladder, uterine cervix, or . penis may be termed epidermoid or squamous-cell carcinomas of the respective tissues and are within the scope of the definition of cancer as well.
  • Sarcomas develop in connective tissues, including fibrous tissues, adipose (fat) tissues, muscle, blood vessels, bone, and cartilage such as osteogenic sarcoma, liposarcoma, fibrosarcoma, and synovial sarcoma.
  • Carcinosarcoma is cancer that develops in both epithelial and connective tissue.
  • Cancer disease within the scope of this definition may be primary or secondary, whereby primary indicates that the cancer originated in the tissue where it is found rather than was established as a secondary site through metastasis from another lesion.
  • Cancers and tumor diseases within the scope of this definition may be benign or malign and may affect all anatomical structures of the body of a mammal.
  • XII the prostate
  • XIII the pancreas, such as ductal carcinoma of the pancreas
  • X V the lymphatic tissue such as lymphomas and other tumors of lymphoid origin
  • XV the skin
  • XVII primary or secondary cancer of the lymph nodes
  • XVIII the tongue and of the bony structures of the hard palate or sinuses
  • XVIV the mouth, cheeks, neck and salivary glands
  • XX the blood vessels including the heart and their linings
  • XXI the smooth or skeletal muscles and their ligaments and linings
  • XXII the peripheral, the autonomous, the central nervous system including the cerebellum
  • XXIII the adipose tissue.
  • the novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following tissues of the hematological system: bone marrow CD33 + cells, erythrocytes, lymph node, bone marrow CD15 + cells, bone marrow CD71 + cells, cord blood CD71 + cells.
  • the expression in the above-mentioned tissues demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose hematological diseases. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat hematological disorders.
  • Hemoglobin in red blood cells is the key component for transporting oxygen from the lungs to the tissues.
  • the level of hemoglobin has fallen below 12g/L. Therefore the oxygen carrying capacity of blood is reduced.
  • Common reasons for anemia include acute or chronic blood loss, insufficient levels of erythropoietin synthesis in the kidneys (e.g. in dialysis patients) or insufficient output of red blood cells from bone marrow after chemotherapy or HIV infection etc..
  • Current therapy of anemia is aimed at increasing the hematocrit either by transfusion or by stimulating erythropoiesis with agents such as erythropoietin. The treatment goal is to restore hemoglobin levels above 12g/L.
  • Neutropenia is an abnormally low white blood cell count which causes an increased incidence of infections.
  • causes of neutropenia include: drug-induced (e.g., following cancer chemotherapy), increased destruction of neutrophils (e.g., immune-mediated) or decreased bone marrow function (e.g., familial neutropenia).
  • neutropenia following cancer chemotherapy is currently treated with growth factors such as G-CSF or GM-
  • the treatment goal is to raise the neutrophil count in order to reduce the susceptibility to infection.
  • Thrombocytopenia is a disorder where the number of platelets is inappropriately low. Since platelets play an essential role in thrombus formation to limit blood loss following vessel injury, insufficient platelet levels may lead to abnormal bleeding. There are many causes of thrombocytopenia including drug-induced thrombocytopenia (e.g., following cancer chemotherapy) and immune thrombocytopenia (due to increased degradation of platelets). Platelet transfusions or IL-11 can be used to restore platelet levels in order to reduce the bleeding risk.
  • Aplastic anemia (Pancyteponia)
  • Aplastic anemia is a life-threatening hematologic disorder characterized by absent or markedly diminished hematopoietic precursors in the bone marrow and resulting in neutropenia, anemia and thrombocytopenia.
  • a large number of agents can cause aplastic anemia (drugs, chemicals and toxins) radiation and certain infections can also induce aplastic anemia. More frequently, aplastic anemia occurs as an unpredictable idiosyncratic reaction to drugs such as anti-inflammatory agents, antibiotics, and antiepileptic drugs.
  • Aplastic anemia typically develops weeks or month during drug administration or delayed after drug administration has been discontinued.
  • aplastic anemia Several congenital and familiar forms of aplastic anemia have been described, including Fanconi's anemia, Shwachman-Diamond syndrome, familiar aplastic anemia, and aplasia associated with dyskeratosis congenita or amega- karyocytic thrompocytopenia.
  • the novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following cardiovascular related tissues: interventricular septum, coronary artery, coronary artery sclerotic, heart atrium (right), HUVEC cells, aorta sclerotic, aorta, artery, heart atrium (left), vein, coronary artery smooth muscle primary cells.
  • Expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue coronary artery sclerotic and healthy tissue coronary artery, between diseased tissue aorta sclerotic and healthy tissue aorta demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose cardiovascular diseases. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat cardiovascular diseases.
  • Cardiovascular diseases include the following disorders of the heart and the vascular system: congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, ischemic diseases of the heart, all kinds of atrial and ventricular arrhythmias, hypertensive vascular diseases, and peripheral vascular diseases.
  • Heart failure is defined as a pathophysiologic state in which an abnormality of cardiac function is responsible for the failure of the heart to pump blood at a rate commensurate with the requirement of the metabolizing tissue. It includes all forms of pumping failure, such as high-output and low-output, acute and chronic, right- sided or left-sided, systolic or diastolic, independent of the underlying cause.
  • MI Myocardial infarction
  • Ischemic diseases are conditions in which the coronary flow is restricted resulting in a perfusion which inadequate to meet the myocardial requirement for oxygen.
  • This group of diseases includes stable angina, unstable angina, and asymptomatic ischemia.
  • Arrhythmias include all forms of atrial and ventricular tachyarrhythmias (atrial tachycardia, atrial flutter, atrial fibrillation, atrio-ventricular reentrant tachycardia, preexcitation syndrome, ventricular tachycardia, ventricular flutter, and ventricular fibrillation), as well as bradycardic forms of arrhythmias.
  • vascular diseases include primary as well as all kinds of secondary arterial hypertension (renal, endocrine, neurogenic, others).
  • the disclosed gene and its product may be used as drug targets for the treatment of hypertension as well as for the prevention of all complications.
  • Peripheral vascular diseases are defined as vascular diseases in which arterial and/or venous flow is reduced resulting in an imbalance between blood supply and tissue oxygen demand. It includes chronic peripheral arterial occlusive disease (PAOD), acute arterial thrombosis and embolism, inflammatory vascular disorders, Raynaud's phenomenon, and venous disorders.
  • PAOD peripheral arterial occlusive disease
  • acute arterial thrombosis and embolism inflammatory vascular disorders
  • Raynaud's phenomenon Raynaud's phenomenon
  • venous disorders venous disorders.
  • the novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following tissues of the respiratory system: lung COPD, lung tumor, lung right lower lobe, lung right upper lobe, lung right mid lobe, lung.
  • the expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue lung COPD and healthy tissue lung demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose COPD and/or Asthma. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat those diseases.
  • allergens typically elicit a specific IgE response and, although in most cases the allergens themselves have little or no intrinsic toxicity, they induce pathology when the IgE response in turn elicits an IgE- dependent or T cell-dependent hypersensitivity reaction.
  • Hypersensitivity reactions can be local or systemic and typically occur within minutes of allergen exposure in individuals who have previously been sensitized to an allergen.
  • the hypersensitivity reaction of allergy develops when the allergen is recognized by IgE antibodies bound to specific receptors on the surface of effector cells, such as mast cells, basophils, or eosinophils, which causes the activation of the effector cells and the release of mediators that produce the acute signs and symptoms of the reactions.
  • Allergic diseases include asthma, allergic rhinitis (hay fever), atopic dermatitis, and anaphylaxis.
  • Asthma is though to arise as a result of interactions between multiple genetic and environmental factors and is characterized by three major features: 1) intermittent and reversible airway obstruction caused by bronchoconstriction, increased mucus production, and thickening of the walls of the airways that leads to a narrowing of the airways, 2) airway hyperresponsiveness caused by a decreased control of airway caliber, and 3) airway inflammation.
  • Certain cells are critical to the inflammatory reaction of asthma and they include T cells and antigen presenting cells, B cells that produce IgE, and mast cells, basophils, eosinophils, and other cells that bind IgE.
  • effector cells accumulate at the site of allergic reaction in the airways and release toxic products that contribute to the acute pathology and eventually to the tissue destruction related to the disorder.
  • Other resident cells such as smooth muscle cells, lung epithelial cells, mucus-producing cells, and nerve cells may also be abnormal in individuals with asthma and may contribute to the pathology. While the airway obstruction of asthma, presenting clinically as an intermittent wheeze and shortness of breath, is generally the most pressing symptom of the disease requiring immediate treatment, the inflammation and tissue destruction associated with the disease can lead to irreversible changes that eventually make asthma a chronic disabling disorder requiring long-term management.
  • Glycophorin A Cho and Sharom, Cell. Immunol. 145, 223-39, 1992
  • cyclosporin Alexander et al, Lancet 339, 324-28, 1992
  • a nonapeptide fragment of IL-2 Zav'yalov et al, Immunol Lett. 31, 285-88, 1992
  • cyclosporin is used as a immuno- suppressant after organ transplantation.
  • COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary (or airways) disease
  • COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary (or airways) disease
  • Emphysema is characterized by destruction of alveolar walls leading to abnormal enlargement of the air spaces of the lung.
  • Chronic bronchitis is defined clinically as the presence of chronic productive cough for three months in each of two successive years.
  • airflow obstruction is usually progressive and is only partially reversible. By far the most important risk factor for development of COPD is cigarette smoking, although the disease does occur in non-smokers.
  • the inflammatory cell population comprises increased numbers of macrophages, neutrophils, and CD8 .
  • lymphocytes Inhaled irritants, such as cigarette smoke, activate macrophages which are resident in the respiratory tract, as well as epithelial cells leading to release of chemokines (e.g., interleukin-8) and other chemotactic factors. These chemotactic factors act to increase the neutrophil/- monocyte trafficking from the blood into the lung tissue and airways.
  • chemokines e.g., interleukin-8
  • chemotactic factors act to increase the neutrophil/- monocyte trafficking from the blood into the lung tissue and airways.
  • Neutrophils and monocytes recruited into the airways can release a variety of potentially damaging mediators such as proteolytic enzymes and reactive oxygen species. Matrix degradation and emphysema, along with airway wall thickening, surfactant dysfunction, and mucus hypersecretion, all are potential sequelae of this inflammatory response
  • This invention further pertains to the use of novel agents identified by the screening assays described above. Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to use a test compound identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model.
  • an agent identified as described herein e.g., a modulating agent, an antisense nucleic acid molecule, a specific antibody, ribozyme, or a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide binding molecule
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent.
  • an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent.
  • this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening • assays for treatments as described herein.
  • a reagent which affects neurotransmitter transporter activity can be administered to a human cell, either in vitro or in vivo, to reduce neurotransmitter transporter activity.
  • the reagent preferably binds to an expression product of a human neurotransmitter transporter gene. If the expression product is a protein, the reagent is preferably an antibody.
  • an antibody can be added to a preparation of stem cells that have been removed from the body. The cells can then be replaced in the same or another human body, with or without clonal propagation, as is known in the art.
  • the reagent is delivered using a liposome.
  • the liposome is stable in the animal into which it has been administered for at least about 30 minutes, more preferably for at least about 1 hour, and even more preferably for at least about 24 hours.
  • a liposome comprises a lipid composition that is capable of targeting a reagent, particularly a polynucleotide, to a particular site in an animal, such as a human.
  • the lipid composition of the liposome is capable of targeting to a specific organ of an animal, such as the lung, liver, spleen, heart brain, lymph nodes, and skin.
  • a liposome useful in the present invention comprises a lipid composition that is capable of fusing with the plasma membrane of the targeted cell to deliver its contents to the cell.
  • the ttansfection efficiency of a liposome is about 0.5 ⁇ g of DNA per 16 nmole of liposome delivered to about 10 cells, more preferably about 1.0 ⁇ g of DNA per 16 nmole of liposome delivered to about 10 6 cells, and even more preferably about 2.0 ⁇ g of DNA per .16 nmol of liposome delivered to about 10 6 cells.
  • a liposome is between about 100 and
  • 500 nm more preferably between about 150 and 450 nm, and even more preferably between about 200 and 400 nm in diameter.
  • Suitable liposomes for use in the present invention include those liposomes standardly used in, for example, gene delivery methods known to those of skill in the art. More prefened liposomes include liposomes having a polycationic lipid composition and/or liposomes having a cholesterol backbone conjugated to polyethylene glycol.
  • a liposome comprises a compound capable of targeting the liposome to a particular cell type, such as a cell-specific ligand exposed on the outer surface of the liposome.
  • a liposome with a reagent such as an antisense oligonucleotide or ribozyme can be achieved using methods that are standard in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent 5,705,151).
  • a reagent such as an antisense oligonucleotide or ribozyme
  • from about 0.1 ⁇ g to about 10 ⁇ g of polynucleotide is combined with about 8 nmol of liposomes, more preferably from about 0.5 ⁇ g to about 5 ⁇ g of polynucleotides are combined with about 8 nmol liposomes, and even more preferably about 1.0 ⁇ g of polynucleotides is combined with about 8 nmol liposomes.
  • antibodies can be delivered to specific tissues in vivo using receptor-mediated targeted delivery.
  • Receptor-mediated DNA delivery techniques are taught in, for example, Findeis et al. Trends in Biotechnol. 11, 202-05 (1993); Chiou et al, GENE THERAPEUTICS: METHODS AND APPLICATIONS OF DIRECT GENE TRANSFER (J.A. Wolff, ed.) (1994); Wu & Wu, J. Biol Chem. 263, 621-24 (1988); Wu et al, J. Biol Chem. 269, 542-46 (1994); Zenke et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87, 3655-59 (1990); Wu et al, J. Biol Chem. 266, 338-42 (1991).
  • a therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of active ingredient which increases or decreases functional activity relative to the' functional activity which occurs in the absence of the therapeutically effective dose.
  • the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially either in cell culture assays or in animal models, usually mice, rabbits, dogs, or pigs.
  • the animal model also can be used to determine the appropriate concentration range and route of administration. Such information can then be used to determine useful doses and routes for administration in humans.
  • Therapeutic efficacy and toxicity e.g., ED 50 (the dose therapeutically effective in
  • LD 50 the dose lethal to 50%o of the population
  • the dose ratio of toxic to therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index, and it can be expressed as the ratio, LD 5 o/ED 50 .
  • compositions that exhibit large therapeutic indices are prefened.
  • the data obtained from cell culture assays and animal studies is used in formulating a range of dosage for human use.
  • the dosage contained in such compositions is preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED 50 with little or no toxicity.
  • the dosage varies within this range depending upon the dosage form employed, sensitivity of the patient, and the route of administration. The exact dosage will be determined by the practitioner, in light of factors related to the subject that requires treatment. Dosage and administration are adjusted to provide sufficient levels of the active ingredient or to maintain the desired effect.
  • Factors that can be taken into account include the severity of the disease state, general health of the subject, age, weight, and gender of the subject, diet, time and frequency of administration, drug combination(s), reaction sensitivities, and tolerance/response to therapy.
  • Long-acting pharmaceutical compositions can be administered every 3 to 4 days, every week, or once every two weeks depending on the half-life and clearance rate of the particular formulation.
  • Normal dosage amounts can vary from 0.1 to 100,000 micrograms, up to a total dose of about 1 g, depending upon the route of administration.
  • Guidance as to particular dosages and methods of delivery is provided in the literature and generally available to practitioners in the art. Those skilled in the art will employ different formulations for nucleotides than for proteins or their inhibitors. Similarly, delivery of polynucleotides or polypeptides will be specific to particular cells, conditions, locations, etc.
  • polynucleotides encoding the antibody can be constructed and introduced into a cell either ex vivo or in vivo using well- established techniques including, but not limited to, transferrin-polycation-mediated DNA transfer, transfection with naked or encapsulated nucleic acids, liposome- mediated cellular fusion, intracellular transportation of DNA-coated latex beads, protoplast fusion, viral infection, electroporation, "gene gun,” and DEAE- or calcium phosphate-mediated transfection.
  • Effective in vivo dosages of an antibody are in the range of about 5 ⁇ g to about
  • effective in vivo dosages are in the range of about 100 ng to about 200 ng, 500 ng to about 50 mg, about 1 ⁇ g to about 2 mg, about 5 ⁇ g to about 500 ⁇ g, and about 20 ⁇ g to about 100 ⁇ g of DNA.
  • the reagent is preferably an antisense oligonucleotide or a ribozyme.
  • Polynucleotides that express antisense oligonucleotides or ribozymes can be introduced into cells by a variety of methods, as described above.
  • a reagent reduces expression of a human neurotransmitter transporter gene or the activity of a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% relative to the absence of the reagent.
  • the effectiveness of the mechanism chosen to decrease the level of expression of a human neurotransmitter transporter gene or the activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be assessed using methods well known in the art, such as hybridization of nucleotide probes to neurotransmitter transporter- specific mRNA, quantitative RT-PCR, immunologic detection of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, or measurement of functional activity.
  • any of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered in combination with other appropriate therapeutic agents.
  • Selection of the appropriate agents for use in combination therapy can be made by one of ordinary skill in the art, according to conventional pharmaceutical principles.
  • the combination of therapeutic agents can act synergistically to effect the treatment or prevention of the various disorders described above. Using this approach, one may be able to achieve therapeutic efficacy with lower dosages of each agent, thus reducing the potential for adverse side effects.
  • any of the therapeutic methods described above can be applied to any subject in need of such therapy, including, for example, mammals such as dogs, cats, cows, horses, rabbits, monkeys, and most preferably, humans. Diagnostic methods
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter also can be used in diagnostic assays for detecting diseases and abnormalities or susceptibility to diseases and abnormalities related to the presence of mutations in the nucleic acid sequences that encode the . protein. For example, differences can be determined between the cDNA or genomic sequence encoding neurotransmitter transporter in individuals afflicted with a disease an in normal individuals. If a mutation is observed in some or all of the afflicted individuals but not in normal individuals, then the mutation is likely to be the causative agent of the disease.
  • Sequence differences between a reference gene and a gene having mutations can be revealed by the direct DNA sequencing method.
  • cloned DNA segments can be employed as probes to detect specific DNA segments.
  • the sensitivity of this method is greatly enhanced when combined with PCR.
  • a sequencing primer can be used with a double-stranded PCR product or a single-stranded template molecule generated by a modified PCR.
  • the sequence determination is performed by conventional procedures using radiolabeled nucleotides or by automatic sequencing procedures using fluorescent tags.
  • DNA sequence differences can be carried put by detection of alteration in electrophoretic mobility of DNA fragments in gels with or without denaturing agents. Small sequence deletions and insertions can be visualized, for example, by high resolution gel electrophoresis. DNA fragments of different sequences can be distinguished on denaturing formamide gradient gels in which the mobilities of different DNA fragments are retarded in the gel at different positions according to their specific melting or partial melting temperatures (see, e.g., Myers et al, Science 230, 1242, 1985). Sequence changes at specific locations can also be revealed by nuclease protection assays, such as RNase and S 1 protection or the chemical cleavage method (e.g., Cotton et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85,
  • the detection of a specific DNA sequence can be performed by methods such as hybridization, RNase protection, chemical cleavage, direct DNA sequencing or the use of restriction enzymes and Southern blotting of genomic DNA.
  • direct methods such as gel-electrophoresis and DNA sequencing, mutations can also be detected by in situ analysis.
  • Altered levels of neurotransmitter transporter also can be detected in various tissues.
  • Assays used to detect levels of the receptor polypeptides in a body sample, such as blood or a tissue biopsy, derived from a host are well known to those of skill in the art and include radioimmunoassays, competitive binding assays, Western blot analysis, and ELISA assays.
  • the polynucleotide of SEQ ID NO: 3 (and 4) is inserted into the expression vector pCEV4 and the expression vector pCEV4 neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide obtained is transfected into human embryonic kidney 293 cells. Successful transfection is examined 2 days post-transfection by a 15-min specific uptake of either 10 n M [2,5,6-H] norepinephrine ([ 3 H]NE) or 10 n M [ 3 H]DA in transiently transfected 239 cells. Specificity of uptake is assessed by parallel uptake assays in the presence of 10 ⁇ M nisoxetine (RBI) or GBR- 12909 (RBI), specific inhibitors of NET and DAT, respectively. It is shown that the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 2 (and 5) have neurotransmitter transporter activity.
  • the Pichia pastoris expression vector pPICZB (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) is used to produce large quantities of recombinant human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides in yeast.
  • the neurotransmitter transporter-encoding DNA sequence is derived from SEQ ID NO: 1 or 4. Before insertion into vector pPICZB, the DNA sequence is modified by well known methods in such a way that it contains at its
  • DNA sequence is ligated into pPICZB.
  • This expression vector is designed for inducible expression in Pichia pastoris, driven by a yeast promoter.
  • the resulting pPICZ/md-His6 vector is used to transform the yeast.
  • the yeast is cultivated under ' usual conditions in 5 liter shake flasks and the recombinantly produced protein isolated from the culture by affinity chromatography (Ni-NTA-Resin) in the presence of 8 M urea.
  • the bound polypeptide is eluted with buffer, pH 3.5, and neutralized. Separation of the polypeptide from the His6 reporter tag is accomplished by site-specific proteolysis using enterokinase (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) according to manufacturer's instructions. Purified human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is obtained.
  • Purified neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides comprising a glutathione-S- transferase protein and absorbed onto glutathione-derivatized wells of 96-well microtiter plates are contacted with test compounds from a small molecule library at pH 7.0 in a physiological buffer solution.
  • Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides comprise the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or 5.
  • the test compounds comprise a fluorescent tag. The samples are incubated for 5 minutes to one hour. Control samples are incubated in the absence of a test compound.
  • the buffer solution containing the test compounds is washed from the wells. Binding of a test compound to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is detected by fluorescence measurements of the contents of the wells. A test compound that increases the fluorescence in a well by at least 15%> relative to fluorescence of a well in which a test compound is not incubated is identified as a compound which binds to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
  • test compound is administered to a culture of human cells transfected with a neurotransmitter transporter expression construct and incubated at 37°C for 10 to 45 minutes.
  • a culture of the same type of cells that have not been transfected is incubated for the same time without the test compound to provide a negative control.
  • RNA is isolated from the two cultures as described in Chirgwin et al, Biochem. 18,
  • Northern blots are prepared using 20 to 30 ⁇ g total RNA and hybridized with a 32 P-labeled neurotransmitter transporter-specific probe at 65°C in Express-hyb (CLONTECH).
  • the probe comprises at least 11 contiguous nucleotides selected from the complement of SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4.
  • a test compound that decreases the neurotransmitter transporter-specific signal relative to the signal obtained in the absence of the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of neurotransmitter transporter gene expression.
  • test compound is administered to a culture of human cells transfected with a neurotransmitter transporter expression construct and incubated at 37°C for 10 to 45 minutes.
  • a culture of the same type of cells that have not been transfected is incubated for the same time without the test compound to provide a negative control.
  • Functional activity is measured by assessing neurotransmitter uptake, as is known in the art.
  • a test compound which decreases the functional activity of the neurotransmitter transporter relative to the functional activity in the absence of the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of neurotransmitter transporter activity.
  • RT-PCR Reverse Transcription-Polymerase Chain Reaction
  • expression is determined in the following tissues: adrenal gland, bone marrow, brain, cerebellum, colon, fetal brain, fetal liver, heart, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle, small intestine, spinal cord, spleen, stomach, testis, thymus, thyroid, trachea, uterus, and peripheral blood lymphocytes.
  • Expression in the following cancer cell lines also is determined: DU- 145 (prostate), NCI-H125 (lung), HT-29 (colon), COLO-205 (colon), A-549 (lung),
  • NCI-H460 (lung), HT-116 (colon), DLD-1 (colon), MDA-MD-231 (breast), LS174T (colon), ZF-75 (breast), MDA-MN-435 (breast), HT-1080, MCF-7 (breast), and U87. Matched pairs of malignant and normal tissue from the same patient also are tested.
  • fetal and adult brain muscle, heart, lung, kidney, liver, thymus, testis, colon, placenta, trachea, pancreas, kidney, gastric mucosa, colon, liver, cerebellum, skin, cortex (Alzheimer's and normal), hypothalamus, cortex, amygdala, cerebellum, hippocampus, choroid, plexus, thalamus, and spinal cord.
  • the following whole body panel is screened to show predominant or relatively high expression in lung or immune tissues: brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, trachea, bone manow, colon, small intestine, spleen, stomach, thymus, mammary gland, skeletal muscle, prostate, testis, uterus, cerebellum, fetal brain, fetal liver, spinal cord, placenta, adrenal gland, pancreas, salivary gland, thyroid, peripheral blood leukocytes, lymph node, and tonsil.
  • lung or immune tissues brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, trachea, bone manow, colon, small intestine, spleen, stomach, thymus, mammary gland, skeletal muscle, prostate, testis, uterus, cerebellum, fetal brain, fetal liver, spinal cord, placenta, adrenal gland, pancreas, salivary gland, thyroid, peripheral blood leukocytes, lymph node, and tonsil.
  • lung and immune system cells are screened to localize expression to particular cell subsets: lung micro vascular endothelial cells, bronchial/tracheal epithelial cells, bronchial/tracheal smooth muscle cells, lung fibroblasts, T cells (T helper 1 subset, T helper 2 subset, NKT cell subset, and cytotoxic T lymphocytes), B cells, mononuclear cells (monocytes and macrophages), mast cells, eosinophils, neutrophils, and dendritic cells.
  • T cells T helper 1 subset, T helper 2 subset, NKT cell subset, and cytotoxic T lymphocytes
  • B cells mononuclear cells (monocytes and macrophages)
  • mast cells eosinophils, neutrophils, and dendritic cells.
  • the initial expression panel consists of RNA samples from respiratory tissues and inflammatory cells relevant to COPD: lung (adult and fetal), trachea, freshly isolated alveolar type II cells, cultured human bronchial epithelial cells, cultured small airway epithelial cells, cultured bronchial sooth muscle cells, cultured H441 cells (Clara-like), freshly isolated neutrophils and monocytes, and cultured monocytes (macrophage-like).
  • Body map profiling also is carried out, using total RNA panels purchased from Clontech.
  • the tissues are adrenal gland, bone manow, brain, colon, heart, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle, small intestine, spleen, stomach, testis, thymus, trachea, thyroid, and uterus.
  • Quantitative expression profiling is performed by the form of quantitative PCR analysis called "kinetic analysis” firstly described in Higuchi et al, BioTechnology
  • the probe is cleaved by the 5 '-3' endonuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase and a fluorescent dye released in the medium (Holland et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 88, 7276-80, 1991). Because the fluorescence emission will increase in direct proportion to the amount of the specific amplified product, the exponential growth phase of PCR product can be detected and used to determine the initial template concentration (Heid et al, Genome Res. 6, 986-94, 1996, and Gibson et al, Genome Res. 6, 995-1001, 1996).
  • the amplification of an endogenous control can be performed to standardize the amount of sample RNA added to a reaction.
  • the control of choice is the 18S ribosomal RNA. Because reporter dyes with differing emission spectra are available, the target and the endogenous control can be independently quantified in the same tube if probes labeled with different dyes are used.
  • RNA extraction and cDNA preparation Total RNA from the tissues listed above are used for expression quantification. RNAs labeled "from autopsy” were extracted from autoptic tissues with the TRIzol reagent (Life Technologies, MD) according to the manufacturer's protocol.
  • RNA Fifty ⁇ g of each RNA were treated with DNase I for 1 hour at 37°C in the following reaction mix: 0.2 U/ ⁇ l RNase-free DNase I (Roche Diagnostics, Germany); 0.4 U/ ⁇ l RNase inhibitor (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.9; lOmM MgCl 2 ; 50 mM NaCl; and 1 mM DTT.
  • RNA is extracted once with 1 volume of phenolxhloroform:- isoamyl alcohol (24:24:1) and once with chloroform, and precipitated with 1/10 volume of 3 M sodium acetate, pH5.2, and 2 volumes of ethanol.
  • RNA from the autoptic tissues Fifty ⁇ g of each RNA from the autoptic tissues are DNase treated with the DNA-free kit purchased from Ambion (Ambion, TX). After resuspension and spectro- photometric quantification, each sample is reverse transcribed with the TaqMan Reverse Transcription Reagents (PE Applied Biosystems, CA) according to the manufacturer's protocol. The final concentration of RNA in the reaction mix is 200 ng/ ⁇ L. Reverse transcription is carried out with 2.5 ⁇ M of random hexamer primers.
  • TaqMan quantitative analysis Specific primers and probe are designed according to the recommendations of PE Applied Biosystems; the probe can be labeled at the 5' end FAM (6-carboxy-fluorescein) and at the 3' end with TAMRA (6-carboxy- tetramethyl-rhodamine). Quantification experiments are performed on 10 ng of reverse transcribed RNA from each sample. Each determination is done in triplicate.
  • FAM 6-carboxy-fluorescein
  • TAMRA 6-carboxy- tetramethyl-rhodamine
  • Total cDNA content is normalized with the simultaneous quantification (multiplex PCR) of the 18S ribosomal RNA using the Pre-Developed TaqMan Assay Reagents
  • the assay reaction mix is as follows: IX final TaqMan Universal PCR Master Mix (from 2X stock) (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); IX PDAR control - 18S RNA (from 20X stock); 300 nM forward primer; 900 nM reverse primer; 200 nM probe; 10 ng cDNA; and water to 25 ⁇ l.
  • Acute pain is measured on a hot plate mainly in rats.
  • Two variants of hot plate testing are used: In the classical variant animals are put on a hot surface (52 to 56°C) and the latency time is measured until the animals show nocifensive behavior, such as stepping or foot licking.
  • the other variant is an increasing temperature hot plate where the experimental animals are put on a surface of neutral temperature. Subsequently this surface is slowly but constantly heated until the animals begin to lick a hind paw. The temperature which is reached when hind paw licking begins is a measure for pain threshold.
  • Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated control group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • application routes i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal
  • Persistent pain is measured with the formalin or capsaicin test, mainly in rats. A solution of 1 to 5% formalin or 10 to 100 ⁇ g capsaicin is injected into one hind paw of the experimental animal. After formalin or capsaicin application the animals show nocifensive reactions like flinching, licking and biting of the affected paw. The number of nocifensive reactions within a time frame of up to 90 minutes is a measure for intensity of pain. Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated control group.
  • Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to formalin or capsaicin administration.
  • application routes i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal
  • Neuropathic pain is induced by different variants of unilateral sciatic nerve injury mainly in rats. The operation is performed under anesthesia.
  • the first variant of sciatic nerve injury is produced by placing loosely constrictive ligatures around the common sciatic nerve.
  • the second variant is the tight ligation of about the half of the diameter of the common sciatic nerve.
  • a group of models is used in which tight ligations or transections are made of either the L5 and L6 spinal nerves, or the L%> spinal nerve only.
  • the fourth variant involves an axotomy of two of the three terminal branches of the sciatic nerve (tibial and common peroneal nerves) leaving the remaining sural nerve intact whereas the last variant comprises the axotomy of only the tibial branch leaving the sural and common nerves uninjured. Control animals are treated with a sham operation.
  • the nerve injured animals develop a chronic mechanical allodynia, cold allodynioa, as well as a thermal hyperalgesia.
  • Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC
  • Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy), or by means of a cold plate of 5 to 10°C where the nocifensive reactions of the affected hind paw are counted as a measure of pain intensity.
  • a further test for cold induced pain is the counting of nocifensive reactions, or duration of nocifensive responses after plantar administration of acetone to the affected hind limb.
  • Chronic pain in general is assessed by registering the circadanian rhythms in activity (Surjo and Arndt, Universitat zu K ⁇ ln, Cologne, Germany), and by scoring differences in gait (foot print patterns; FOOTPRINTS program, Klapdor et al, 1997. A low cost method to analyze footprint patterns. J. Neurosci. Methods 75, 49-54). Compounds are tested against sham operated and vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • application routes i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal
  • Inflammatory Pain Inflammatory Pain is induced mainly in rats by injection of 0.75 mg canageenan or complete Freund's adjuvant into one hind paw. The animals develop an edema with mechanical allodynia as well as thermal hyperalgesia. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc-Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA,
  • Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy, Paw thermal stimulator, G. Ozaki, University of California, USA).
  • Plant Test Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy
  • Paw thermal stimulator G. Ozaki, University of California, USA
  • edema measurement two methods are being used. In the first method, the animals are sacrificed and the affected hindpaws sectioned and weighed. The second method comprises differences in paw volume by measuring water displacement in a plethysmometer (Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy).
  • Compounds are tested against uninflamed as well as vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
  • application routes i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal
  • Compounds are tested against diabetic and non-diabetic vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing. Parkinson's disease
  • 6-Hydroxydopamine (6-OH-DA) Lesion. Degeneration of the dopaminergic ni- grostriatal and striatopallidal pathways is the central pathological event in
  • Parkinson's disease This disorder has been mimicked experimentally in rats using single/sequential unilateral stereotaxic injections of 6-OH-DA into the medium forebrain bundle (MFB).
  • MFB medium forebrain bundle
  • mice Male Wistar rats (Harlan Winkelmann, Germany), weighing 200 ⁇ 250 g at the beginning of the experiment, are used. The rats are maintained in a temperature- and humidity-controlled environment under a 12 h light/dark cycle with free access to food and water when not in experimental sessions. The following in vivo protocols are approved by the governmental authorities. All efforts are made to minimize animal suffering, to reduce the number of animals used, and to utilize alternatives to in vivo techniques.
  • Animals are administered pargyline on the day of surgery (Sigma, St. Louis, MO, USA; 50 mg/kg i.p.) in order to inhibit metabolism of 6-OHDA by monoamine oxidase and desmethylimipramine HCl (Sigma; 25 mg/kg i.p.) in order to prevent uptake of 6-OHDA by noradrenergic terminals. Thirty minutes later the rats are anesthetized with sodium pentobarbital (50 mg/kg) and placed in a stereotaxic frame.
  • Stepping Test Forelimb akinesia is assessed three weeks following lesion placement using a modified stepping test protocol.
  • the animals are held by the experimenter with one hand fixing the hindlimbs and slightly raising the hind part above the surface.
  • One paw is touching the table, and is then moved slowly sideways (5 s for 1 m), first in the forehand and then in the backhand direction.
  • the number of adjusting steps is counted for both paws in the backhand and forehand direction of movement.
  • the sequence of testing is right paw forehand and backhand adjusting stepping, followed by left paw forehand and backhand directions.
  • the test is repeated three times on three consecutive days, after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing.
  • Forehand adjusted stepping reveals no consistent differences between lesioned and healthy control animals. Analysis is therefore restricted to backhand adjusted stepping.
  • Balance Test Balance adjustments following postural challenge are also measured during the stepping test sessions.
  • the rats are held in the same position as described in the stepping test and, instead of being moved sideways, tilted by the experimenter towards the side of the paw touching the table. This maneuver results in loss of balance and the ability of the rats to regain balance by forelimb movements is scored on a scale ranging from 0 to 3. Score 0 is given for a normal forelimb placement. When the forelimb movement is delayed but recovery of postural balance detected, score 1 is given. Score 2 represents a clear, yet insufficient, forelimb reaction, as evidenced by muscle contraction, but lack of success in recovering balance, and score 3 is given for no reaction of movement. The test is repeated three times a day on each side for three consecutive days after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing.
  • Staircase Test (Paw Reaching).
  • a modified version of the staircase test is used for evaluation of paw reaching behavior three weeks following primary and secondary lesion placement.
  • Plexiglass test boxes with a central platform and a removable staircase on each side are used.
  • the apparatus is designed such that only the paw on the same side at each staircase can be used, thus providing a measure of independent forelimb use.
  • For each test the animals are left in the test boxes for 15 min.
  • the double staircase is filled with 7 x 3 chow pellets (Precision food pellets, formula: P, purified rodent diet, size 45 mg; Sandown Scientific) on each side.
  • MPTP neurotoxin l-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine
  • DAergic mesencephalic dopaminergic
  • MPTP leads to a marked decrease in the levels of dopamine and its metabolites, and in the number of dopaminergic terminals in the striatum as well as severe loss of the tyrosine hydroxylase (TH)-immunoreactive cell bodies in the substantia nigra, pars compacta.
  • TH tyrosine hydroxylase
  • mice are perfused transcardially with 0.01 M PBS (pH 7.4) for 2 min, followed by 4% paraformaldehyde (Merck) in PBS for 15 min.
  • PBS pH 7.4
  • PBS paraformaldehyde
  • TH free-floating tyrosine hydroxylase
  • Rotarod Test We use a modification of the procedure described by Rozas and Labandeira-Garcia (1997), with a CR-1 Rotamex system (Columbus Instruments, Columbus, OH) comprising an IBM-compatible personal computer, a CIO-24 data acquisition card, a control unit, and a four-lane rotarod unit.
  • the rotarod unit consists of a rotating spindle (diameter 7.3 cm) and individual compartments for each mouse.
  • the system software allows preprogramming of session protocols with varying rotational speeds (0-80 rpm). Infrared beams are used to detect when a mouse has fallen onto the base grid beneath the rotarod. The system logs the fall as the end of the experiment for that mouse, and the total time on the rotarod, as well as the time of the fall and all the set-up parameters, are recorded. The system also allows a weak cunent to be passed through the base grid, to aid training. Dementia
  • the object recognition task has been designed to assess the effects of experimental manipulations on the cognitive performance of rodents.
  • a rat is placed in an open field, in which two identical objects are present.
  • the rats inspects both objects during the first trial of the object recognition task.
  • a second trial after a retention interval of for example 24 hours, one of the two objects used in the first trial, the 'familiar' object, and a novel object are placed in the open field.
  • the inspection time at each of the objects is registered.
  • the basic measures in the OR task is the time spent by a rat exploring the two object the second trial. Good retention is reflected by higher exploration times towards the novel than the 'familiar' object.
  • Administration of the putative cognition enhancer prior to the first trial predominantly allows assessment of the effects on acquisition, and eventually on consolidation processes.
  • Administration of the testing compound after the first trial allows to assess the effects on consolidation processes, whereas administration before the second trial allows to measure effects on retrieval processes.
  • the passive avoidance task assesses memory performance in rats and mice.
  • the inhibitory avoidance apparatus consists of a two-compartment box with a light compartment and a dark compartment. The two compartments are separated by a guillotine door that can be operated by the experimenter. A threshold of 2 cm separates . the two compartments when the guillotine door is raised. When the door is open, the illumination in the dark compartment is about 2 lux. The light intensity is about 500 lux at the center of the floor of the light compartment.
  • Two habituation sessions, one shock session, and a retention session are given, separated by inter-session intervals of 24 hours.
  • the rat is allowed to explore the apparatus for 300 sec.
  • the rat is placed in the light compartment, facing the wall opposite to the guillotine door. After an accommodation period of 15 sec the guillotine door is opened so that all parts of the apparatus can be visited freely. Rats normally avoid brightly lit areas and will enter the dark compartment within a few seconds.
  • the guillotine door between the compartments is lowered as soon as the rat has entered the dark compartment with its four paws, and a scrambled 1 mA footshock is administered for 2 sec.
  • the rat is removed from the apparatus and put back into its home cage.
  • the procedure during the retention session is identical to that of the habituation sessions.
  • the step-through latency that is the first latency of entering the dark compartment (in sec.) during the retention session is an index of the memory performance of the animal; the longer the latency to enter the dark compartment, the better the retention is.
  • the Morris water escape task measures spatial orientation learning in rodents. It is a test system that has extensively been used to investigate the effects of putative therapeutic on the cognitive functions of rats and mice.
  • the performance of an animal is assessed in a circular water tank with an escape -platform that is submerged about 1 cm below the surface of the water. The escape platform is not visible for an animal swimming in the water tank.
  • Abundant extra-maze cues are provided by the furniture in the room, including desks, computer equipment, a second water tank, the presence of the experimenter, and by a radio on a shelf that is playing softly.
  • the animals receive four trials during five daily acquisition sessions. A trial is started by placing an animal into the pool, facing the wall of the tank.
  • Each of four starting positions in the quadrants north, east, south, and west is used once in a series of four trials; their order is randomized.
  • the escape platform is always in the same position.
  • a trial is terminated as soon as the animal had climbs onto the escape platform or when 90 seconds have elapsed, whichever event occurs first.
  • the animal is allowed to stay on the platform for 30 seconds. Then it is taken from the platform and the next trial is started. If an animal did not find the platform within 90 seconds it is put on the platform by the experimenter and is allowed to stay there for 30 seconds.
  • an additional trial is given as a probe trial: the platform is removed, and the time the animal spends in the four quadrants is measured for 30 or 60 seconds. In the probe trial, all animals start from the same start position, opposite to the quadrant where the escape platform had been positioned during acquisition.
  • rats or mice with specific brain lesions which impair cognitive functions, or animals treated with compounds such as scopolamine or MK-801, which interfere with normal learning, or aged animals which suffer from cognitive deficits, are used.
  • the T-maze spontaneous alternation task The T-maze spontaneous alternation task.
  • TeMCAT assesses the spatial memory performance in mice.
  • the start arm and the two goal arms of the T-maze are provided with guillotine doors which can be operated manually by the experimenter.
  • a mouse is put into the start arm at the beginning of training.
  • the guillotine door is closed.
  • the 'forced trial' either the left or right goal arm is blocked by lowering the guillotine door.
  • the mouse After the mouse has been released from the start arm, it will negotiate the maze, eventually enter the open goal arm, and return to the start position, where it will be confined for 5 seconds, by lowering the guillotine door.
  • the animal can choose freely between the left and right goal arm (all guillotine-doors opened) during 14 'free choice' trials. As soon a the mouse has entered one goal arm, the other one is closed. The mouse eventually returns to the start arm and is free to visit whichever go alarm it wants after having been confined to the start arm for 5 seconds. After completion of 14 free choice trials in one session, the animal is removed from the maze. During training, the animal is never handled.
  • the percent alternations out of 14 trials is calculated. This percentage and the total time needed to complete the first forced trial and the subsequent 14 free choice trials (in s) is analyzed.
  • Cognitive deficits are usually induced by an injection of scopolamine, 30 min before the start of the training session. Scopolamine reduced the per-cent alternations to chance level, or below.
  • a cognition enhancer which is always administered before the training session, will at least partially, antagonize the scopolamine-induced reduction in the spontaneous alternation rate.
  • Genitourinary diseases In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
  • Wistar rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized intraperitoneally with ketamine.
  • the abdomen is opened through a midline incision and the bladder and the proximal urethra are exposed.
  • a constant degree of urethral obstruction is produced by tying a ligature around the urethra and a catheter with an outer diameter of 1 mm.
  • the abdominal well is closed and the animals allowed to recover.
  • the rats are anesthetized with ketamine, and the ligature around the urethra is carefully removed to normalize the outlet resistance and enable repetitive micturition.
  • a polyethylene catheter is implanted in the bladder through the dome, and exteriorized at the scapular level. Animals are then allowed to recover for at least 48 hours.
  • Cytometric investigation is performed without anesthesia two days after bladder catheter implantation in control and obstructed animals.
  • the bladder catheter was connected via a T-tube to a strain gauge and a microinjection pump.
  • the conscious rats are held under partial restraint in a restraining device.
  • Warmed saline is infused into the bladder at a rate of 3 ml/hr for control and obstructed animals.
  • the rate of infusion is increased from 3 to 10 ml/hr to obtain similar interval times between micturitions in obstructed and control rats.
  • Overactivity of the obstructed bladders is assessed by measuring the cystometric parameters such as basal pressure, peak micturition pressure, threshold pressure, micturition interval, amplitude and frequency of spontaneous activity and micturition slope. Lluel et al, J. Urol 160, 2253-57, 1998.
  • test compound is dissolved in an appropriate vehicle, such as a mixture of ethanol,
  • Tween 80 (ICN Biomedicals Inc.), and saline (1:1:8, v/v/v), is administered intravenously through the catheter.
  • Genitourinary diseases In vivo testing of compounds/target validation Organ bath assay for measuring agonist-induced contraction of prostate
  • An organ bath assay is employed to measure the agonist-induced contraction of prostate for assessing the biological activity of test compounds (i.e., drug candidates).
  • Male Wistar rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized with ether and sacrificed by dislocating the necks. The whole prostate is excised and placed in oxygenated Modified Krebs-Henseleit solution (pH 7.4) of the following composition (112 mM NaCl, 5.9 mM KC1, 1.2 mM MgCl 2 , 1.2 mM NaH 2 PO 4 , 2 mM CaCl , 2.5 mM NaHCO 3 , 12mM glucose).
  • Ventricle prostate lobes were dissected into several strips depending on the size of prostate. Prostate strips are equilibrated for 60 min in organ bath chambers before any stimulation.
  • Isometric tension is recorded under an appropriate load. Contractile response to adrenergic agonists or electric field stimulation is determined several times until reproducible responses are obtained. Test compounds are pre-incubated prior to the agonistic or electric stimulation. The ratio of each contraction to the negative control is calculated and the effect of the test compounds on the prostate contraction is evaluated.
  • Genitourinary diseases In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
  • An organ bath assay is employed to measure the agonist-induced contraction of urinary bladder for assessing the biological activity of test compounds (i.e., drug candidates).
  • Male Wistar rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized with ether and sacrificed by dislocating the necks. The whole urinary bladder is excised and placed in oxygenated Modified Krebs-Henseleit solution (pH 7.4) of the following composition (112 mM NaCl, 5.9 mM KC1, 1.2 mM MgCl 2 , 1.2 mM NaH 2 PO 4 , 2 mM CaCl 2 , 2.5 mM NaHCO 3 , 12 mM glucose).
  • Isometric tension is recorded under an appropriate load using longitudinal strips of rat detrusor muscle. Bladder strips are equilibrated for 60 minutes before each stimulation. Contractile response to 80 mM KC1 is determined at 15 minute intervals until reproducible responses are obtained. The response to KC1 is used as an internal standard to evaluate the effect of test compounds. The effects of test compounds are investigated by incubating the strips with compounds for 30 minutes prior to stimulation with an appropriate agonist or electrical stimulation. One of the preparations made from the same animal serves as a control, while others are used for evaluating test compounds. The ratio of each contraction to the internal standard (e.g., a KCl-induced contraction) is calculated, and the effects of the test compounds on the contraction are evaluated.
  • the internal standard e.g., a KCl-induced contraction
  • Genitourinary diseases In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
  • Rats are anesthetized by intraperitoneal administration of urethane (Sigma) at 1.25 g/kg.
  • the abdomen is opened through a midline incision, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) is implanted into the bladder through the dome.
  • a polyethylene catheter BECTON DICKINSON, PE50
  • saline Otsuka
  • Rats are anesthetized by intramuscular administration of ketamine (75 mg/kg) and xylazine (15 mg/kg).
  • the abdomen is opened through a midline incision, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) is implanted into the bladder through the dome.
  • the catheter is tunneled through subcutis of the animal by needle (14G) to neck.
  • the inguinal region is incised, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) filled with saline (Otsuka) is inserted into a femoral vein.
  • the catheter is tunneled through subcutis of the animal by needle to neck.
  • the bladder catheter is connected via T-tube to a pressure transducer (Viggo-Spectramed Pte Ltd, DT-XXAD) and a micro- injection pump (TERUMO). Saline is infused at room temperature into the bladder at a rate of 10 ml/hr. Intravesicular pressure is recorded continuously on a chart pen recorder (Yokogawa). At least three reproducible micturition cycles are recorded before a test compound administration.
  • test compounds A test compound dissolved in the mixture of ethanol, Tween 80 (ICN Biomedicals Inc.) and saline (1 : 1 : 8, v/v/v) is administered intravenously through the catheter.
  • Tween 80 ICN Biomedicals Inc.
  • saline 1 : 1 : 8, v/v/v
  • the cell line used for testing is the human colon cancer cell line HCT116.
  • Cells are cultured in RPMI-1640 with 10-15%) fetal calf serum at a concentration of 10,000 cells per milliliter in a volume of 0.5 ml and kept at 37°C in a 95% air/5%>CO 2 atmosphere.
  • Phosphorothioate oligoribonucleotides are synthesized on an Applied Biosystems Model 380B DNA synthesizer using phosphoroamidite chemistry. A sequence of 24 bases complementary to the nucleotides at position 1 to 24 of SEQ ID NO: 1 is used as the test oligonucleotide. As a control, another (random) sequence is used: 5'-TCA ACT GAC TAG ATG TAC ATG GAC-3' (SEQ ID NO: 10). Following assembly and deprotection, oligonucleotides are ethanol-precipitated twice, dried, and suspended in phosphate buffered saline at the desired concentration.
  • oligonucleotides Purity of the oligonucleotides is tested by capillary gel electrophoresis and ion exchange HPLC. The purified oligonucleotides are added to the culture medium at a concentration of 10 ⁇ M once per day for seven days.
  • test oligonucleotide for seven days results in significantly reduced expression of neurotransmitter transporter as determined by Western blotting. This effect is not observed with the control oligonucleotide. After 3 to 7 days, the number of cells in the cultures is counted using an automatic cell counter.
  • the number of cells in cultures treated with the test oligonucleotide (expressed as 100%) is compared with the number of cells in cultures treated with the control oligonucleotide.
  • the number of cells in cultures treated with the test oligonucleotide is not more than 30%> of control, indicating that the inhibition of neurotransmitter transporter has an anti-proliferative effect on cancer cells.
  • This non-tumor assay measures the ability of a compound to reduce either the endogenous level of a circulating hormone or the level of hormone produced in response to a biologic stimulus.
  • Rodents are administered test compound (p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c).
  • blood plasma is collected. Plasma is assayed for levels of the hormone of interest. If the normal circulating levels of the hormone are too low and/or variable to provide consistent results, the level of the hormone may be elevated by a pre-treatment with a biologic stimulus (i.e., LHRH may be injected i.m. into mice at a dosage of 30 ng/mouse to induce a burst of testosterone synthesis).
  • a biologic stimulus i.e., LHRH may be injected i.m. into mice at a dosage of 30 ng/mouse to induce a burst of testosterone synthesis.
  • the timing of plasma collection would be adjusted to coincide with the peak of the induced hormone response.
  • Compound effects are compared to a vehicle-treated control group.
  • An F- test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test. Significance is p value ⁇ 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
  • Hollow fibers are prepared with desired cell line(s) and implanted intraperitoneally and/or subcutaneously in rodents.
  • Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c.
  • Fibers are harvested in accordance with specific readout assay protocol, these may include assays for gene expression (bDNA, PCR, or Taqman), or a specific biochemical activity (i.e., cAMP levels. Results are analyzed by Student's t-test or Rank Sum test after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance at p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group. Subacute Functional In Vivo Assays
  • Rodents are administered test compound (p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c.) according to a predetermined schedule and for a predetermined duration (i.e., 1 week).
  • a predetermined schedule i.e. 1 week.
  • animals are weighed, the target organ is excised, any fluid is expressed, and the weight of the organ is recorded.
  • Blood plasma may also be collected. Plasma may be assayed for levels of a hormone of interest or for levels of test agent.
  • Organ weights may be directly compared or they may be normalized for the body weight of the animal.
  • Compound effects are compared to a vehicle-treated control group.
  • An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test. Significance is p value ⁇ 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
  • Hollow fibers are prepared with desired cell line(s) and implanted intraperitoneally and/or subcutaneously in rodents. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. Fibers are harvested in accordance with specific readout assay protocol. Cell proliferation is determined by measuring a marker of cell number (i.e., MTT or LDH). The cell number and change in cell number from the starting inoculum are analyzed by Student's t-test or Rank Sum test after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance at p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group.
  • Hydron pellets with or without growth factors or cells are implanted into a micropocket surgically created in the rodent cornea.
  • Compound administration may be systemic or local (compound mixed with growth factors in the hydron pellet).
  • Corneas are harvested at 7 days post implantation immediately following intracardiac infusion of colloidal carbon and are fixed in 10%> formalin. Readout is qualitative scoring and/or image analysis. Qualitative scores are compared by Rank Sum test. Image analysis data is evaluated by measuring the area of neovascularization (in pixels) and group averages are compared by Student's t-test (2 tail). Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the growth factor or cells only group.
  • Matrigel containing cells or growth factors, is injected subcutaneously. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. Matrigel plugs are harvested at predetermined time point(s) and prepared for readout. Readout is an ELISA-based assay for hemoglobin concentration and/or histological examination (i.e. vessel count, special staining for endothelial surface markers: CD31, factor-8). Readouts are analyzed by Student's t-test, after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group.
  • Tumor cells or fragments are implanted subcutaneously on Day 0. Vehicle and or compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule starting at a time, usually on Day 1, prior to the ability to measure the tumor burden. Body weights and tumor measurements are recorded 2-3 times weekly. Mean net body and tumor weights are calculated for each data collection day. Anti- rumor efficacy may be initially determined by comparing the size of treated (T) and control (C) tumors on a given day by a Student's t-test, after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05.
  • Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan-
  • Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size Significance is p ⁇ 0.05.
  • Tumor cells are injected intraperitoneally or intracranially on Day 0.
  • Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule starting on Day 1. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded twice daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Morbidity/mortality data is expressed in terms of the median time of survival and the number of long- term survivors is indicated separately. Survival times are used to generate Kaplan- Meier curves. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 by a log-rank test compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • Tumor cells or fragments are implanted subcutaneously and grown to the desired size for treatment to begin. Once at the predetermined size range, mice are randomized into treatment groups. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Tumor and body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. Mean tumor weights of all groups over days post inoculation are graphed for comparison. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the control group.
  • Tumor measurements may be recorded after dosing has stopped to monitor tumor growth delay.
  • Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan-Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size. Significance is p value ⁇ 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
  • Tumor cells or fragments, of mammary adenocarcinoma origin are implanted directly into a surgically exposed and reflected mammary fat pad in rodents.
  • the fat pad is placed back in its original position and the surgical site is closed.
  • Hormones may also be administered to the rodents to support the growth of the tumors.
  • Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Tumor and body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly.
  • Mean rumor weights of all groups over, days post inoculation are graphed for comparison.
  • An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the control group. '
  • Tumor measurements may be recorded after dosing has stopped to monitor tumor growth delay.
  • Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan-Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size. Significance is p vafue ⁇ 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
  • this model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ, or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • Tumor cells or fragments, of prostatic adenocarcinoma origin are implanted directly into a surgically exposed dorsal lobe of the prostate in rodents.
  • the prostate is externalized through an abdominal incision so that the tumor can be implanted specifically in the dorsal lobe while verifying that the implant does not enter the seminal vesicles.
  • the successfully inoculated prostate is replaced in the abdomen and the incisions through the abdomen and skin are closed.
  • Hormones may also be administered to the rodents to support the growth of the tumors.
  • Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly.
  • the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected.
  • the size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope.
  • An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the. treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the control group.
  • This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the lungs), or measuring the target organ weight (i.e., the regional lymph nodes). The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • Intrabronchial Assay Intrabronchial Assay
  • Tumor cells of pulmonary origin may be implanted intrabronchially by making an incision through the skin and exposing the trachea.
  • the trachea is pierced with the beveled end of a 25-gauge needle and the tumor cells are inoculated into the main bronchus using a flat-ended 27-gauge needle with a 90° bend.
  • Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. At a predetermined time, the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected.
  • the size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope.
  • An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the control group.
  • This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the contralateral lung), or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • Tumor cells of gastrointestinal origin may be implanted intracecally by making an abdominal incision through the skin and externalizing the intestine. Tumor cells are inoculated into the cecal wall without penetrating the lumen of the intestine using a 27 or 30 gauge needle. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. At a predetermined time, the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected. The size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope.
  • An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t- test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 as compared to the control group. This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the liver), or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • Tumor cells are inoculated s.c. and the tumors allowed to grow to a predetermined range for spontaneous metastasis studies to the lung or liver. These primary tumors are then excised. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule which may include the period leading up to the excision of the primary tumor to evaluate therapies directed at inhibiting the early stages of tumor metastasis. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Potential endpoints include survival time, numbers of visible foci per target organ, or target organ weight. When survival time is used as the endpoint the other values are not determined.
  • Tumor cells are injected into the tail vein, portal vein, or the left ventricle of the heart in experimental (forced) lung, liver, and bone metastasis studies, respectively.
  • Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Potential endpoints include survival time, numbers of visible foci per target organ, or target organ weight. When survival time is used as the endpoint the other values are not determined. Survival data is used to generate Kaplan-Meier curves. Significance is p ⁇ 0.05 by a log-rank test compared to the control group in the experiment.
  • the mean number of visible tumor foci, as determined under a dissecting microscope, and the mean target organ weights are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance at p ⁇ 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group in the experiment for both endpoints.
  • CD34 + cells were purified by immunomagnetic separation system (MiniMACS, Miltenyi Biotec), according to the manufacture's instructions (Direct CD34 Progenitor Cell Isolation Kit, Miltenyi Biotec). The percentage of CD34 + cells were generally from 90-95%>. Erythropoiesis/ Anemia Erythroid CD34 + Liquid Culture
  • 1-2 x 10 4 CD34 + cells were plated in triplicate in 24-well plates with 1 ml Iscoves modified Dulbecco medium (IMDM) (Invitrogen) containing 10%> fetal bovine serum
  • IMDM Iscoves modified Dulbecco medium
  • FCS Invitrogen
  • Glutamine Invitrogen
  • SCF 25 ng/ml
  • Etythropoietin Erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml)
  • Erypo ® FS 4000 Cilag
  • Control cells were incubated with 0.1- 0.2% DMSO instead of compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%o CO 2 . After 9 to 14 days cells were harvested, counted and stained with phycoerythrin (PE)-conjugated mAb against Glycophorin A (Pharmingen) to analyze differentiation.
  • PE phycoerythrin
  • lxlO 5 Cord Blood CD34 + cells/ml were cultured in IMDM containing 15% BIT- 9500 (Cell Systems ® ), supplemented with IL-3 (10 ng/ml), IL-6 (10 ng/ml) and SCF
  • CD34 + cells/ml were cultured in IMDM containing 15% BIT- 9500 supplemented with IL-3 (10 ng/ml), IL-6 (lOng/ml) and SCF (25 ng/ml) and incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%> CO 2 . 3 and 5 days after initiation of culture an equal volume of fresh medium supplemented with 2X cytokines were added. On day 6 to 7 cells were stained with PE-conjugated mAb against CD36 (Pharmingen) and CD36 cells were purified using anti-PE microbeads. and Mini MACS system (Miltenyi Biotec) according to the manufacture's instructions.
  • CD36 + cells were plated in triplicate 24well plates with 1ml IMDM containing 10% FCS, 1% Glutamine supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml), different concentration of Erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) with or without compounds. Control cells were incubated with 0.1-0.2%) DMSO instead of compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5% CO 2 . After 6 to 8 days cells were harvested and counted to analyze proliferation.
  • CD34 + cells isolated from peripheral blood, cord blood or from bone manow were pre-incubated in quadruplicate in 24-well plates in 1ml medium (StemSpan) with 15% FCS, SCF (20 ng/ml) and GM-CSF (2,5 ng/ml) for 6 to 7 days at 37°C and 5.5% CO 2 . Then compounds (0.1.1 or 10 ⁇ M in DMSO) with or without G-CSF (0.25 ng/ml; Neupogen ® ) were added and incubated for another 6 to 7 days.
  • the number of the early myelopoietic CD15 + /CDllb " cells and the number of the late myelopoietic CD15 + /CDl lb + cells were determined by cell count (proliferation) and FACS (fluorescent associated cell sorting) analysis (differentiation) at day 13-14.
  • TPO (0-10 ng/ml) for 12 to 13 days at 37°C and 5% CO 2 .
  • mice were used for compound testing.
  • other species e.g. rats, hamsters or guinea pigs have been used in addition.
  • repeated dosage is required for detection of changes in peripheral blood parameters.
  • blood samples were drawn for analysis of red and white blood cell counts as well as platelet counts using an automated blood analyzer.
  • erythropoiesis was assessed by manual hematocrit and reticulocyte count determination. For specific analysis of leukocyte differentiation fluorescent associated cell sorting (FACS) was used.
  • FACS leukocyte differentiation fluorescent associated cell sorting
  • Immunocompetent Balb/c mice were treated with compounds at different doses (based on pharmacokinetic data) once/day or bid per-orally or parenterally for up to
  • the WBC white blood cells count
  • the neutrophil count were monitored by FACS (CDl lb + ; scatter properties).
  • Immunocompromised Balb/c were generated by intravenous treatment with 5-FU (100 mg/kg i.p). 24 hours later the mice were treated with the test compound at different doses (based on pharmacokinetic data) once/day or bid per-orally or parenterally for up to 7 to 13 days.
  • Peripheral blood counts (WBC, RBC, PLT) have been determined after retroorbital plexus puncture at days 5,7,11 and 14.
  • WBC, RBC, PLT Peripheral blood counts
  • the expression of specific differentiation markers on stem and progenitor cells e.g. CD34, CD33, CD38, CDllb
  • scatter properties were investigated.
  • Thrombopoietic compounds at different doses were administered orally or parenterally following chemotherapy (Carboplatin, 100 mg/kg i.p) immunocompromised mice. After repeated administration (once/day or bid for five to seven days) peripheral blood platelets (automated blood analyzer) have been determined after retroorbital plexus punction at day 5, 7, 11, and 14. EXAMPLE 15
  • Atherosclerosis In vivo target validation
  • mice Effects on plasma cholesterol levels including HDL cholesterol are typically assessed in humanized apo-AI transgenic mice. Modulation of human target proteins can be determined in conesponding transgenic mice (e.g., CETP transgenic mice). Triglyceride lowering is usually evaluated in ob/ob mice or Zucker rats. Animals are fed with normal diets or modified diets (e.g., enriched by 0.5 % cholesterol 20% coconut oil). Standard protocols consist of oral applications once daily for 7 to 10 days at doses ranging from 0,1 to 100 mg/kg. The compounds are dissolved (e.g., in Solutol/Ethanol/saline mixtures) and applied by oral gavage or intravenous injection. Before and at the end of the application period, blood samples are typically drawn by retroorbital punctuation. Plasma cholesterol and triglyceride levels are determined with standardized clinical diagnostic kits (e.g., INFINITYTM cholesterol reagent and
  • HDL cholesterol is determined after phosphotungstic acid precipitation of non-HDL lipoproteins or FPLC gel filtration with post-column derivatization of cholesterol using the reagents mentioned above. Plasma levels of human apolipoprotein-AJ in relevant humanized transgenic mice are measured by immunoturbidimetry (Sigma).
  • Test compounds are administered orally or intravenously.
  • Female conscious SHR (MoellegaardDenmark, 220 - 290 g) are equipped with implantable radiotelemetry, and a data acquisition system (Data Sciences, St. Paul, MN, USA), comprising .a chronically implantable transducer/transmitter unit equipped with a fluid-filled catheter is used. The transmitter is implanted into the peritoneal cavity, and the sensing catheter is inserted into the descending* aorta.
  • the animals of control groups only receive the vehicle.
  • mean blood pressure and heart rate of treated and untreated control groups are measured.
  • a parasympathetic blockade is achieved by intermittent injections of atropine (0.1 mg per animal) (AtropinsulfatR, Eifelfango, Bad Neuenahr, Germany). After intubation the animals are artificially ventilated at constant volume (Engstr ⁇ mR 300, Engstr ⁇ m, Sweden) with room air enriched with 30%> oxygen to maintain an end-tidal CO2 concentration of about 5% (NormocapR, Datex, Finland).
  • a tip catheter for recording of left ventricular pressure is inserted into the ventricle via the carotid artery (PC350, Millar Instruments, Houston, TX, USA), a hollow catheter is inserted into the femoral artery and connected to a strain gauge (type 4-327-1, Telos Medical, Upland, CA, USA for recording of arterial blood pressure, two venous catheters are inserted into either femoral vein and one additional catheter into a forearm vein for application of the anaesthetic and drugs, respectively, and an oxymetry catheter for recording of oxygen saturation is inserted into the coronary sinus via the jugular vein (Schwarzer IVH4, M ⁇ nchen, Germany).
  • LCX left coronary artery
  • LCX left coronary artery
  • an electromagnetic flow probe Gould Statham, Oxnard, CA, USA
  • Arterial blood pressure, electrocardiogram (lead II), left ventricular pressure, first derivative of left ventricular pressure (dP/dt), heart rate, coronary blood flow, and oxygen saturation in the coronary sinus are continuously recorded on a pen recorder (Brush, Gould, Cleveland, OH, USA).
  • the maximum of dP/dt is used as measure of left ventricular contractility (dP/dtmax).
  • test compound is intravenously applied as bolus injections. Care is taken that all measured cardiovascular parameters have returned to control level before injection of the next dose.
  • Each dose of the test compound is tested at least three times in different animals. The order of injection of the different doses is randomized in each animal.
  • mice All mice are exposed to the smoke from 2 unfiltered cigarettes per day for 6 days per week for 14 weeks. Non-smoking, age-matched animals are used as controls. Animals are orally dosed with test compound or vehicle 1 hour before and 7 hours after smoke exposure. This twice-daily dosing regime is continued throughout the smoke exposure period. On day 7 of the weekly exposure, animals are given only 1 dose of test compound and are not exposed to cigarette smoke.
  • mice After the smoke exposure period, the mice are killed, their lungs inflated with phosphate-buffered formalin via their trachea, and then the lungs and heart are removed en bloc and fixed at 4°C for 48 hours. The lungs are then prepared for paraffin wax sectioning, and 4 mm sections are cut and mounted on glass slides. Sections are then stained with hematoxylin and eosin. Morphometric analysis of lung sections is done by calculation of the Linear Mean Intercept (LMI) parameter using a semi-automated computer image analysis system. Each slide (1 per mouse) contains several sections originating from multiple lobes. Twelve non-overlapping areas (each area covering 1.53 x 10-3 cm 2 ) are randomly selected for LMI analysis.
  • LMI Linear Mean Intercept
  • the 12 areas cover a minimum of two lobes per slide.
  • Non-parenchymal components airways, blood vessels
  • the mean intercept length is calculated for each mouse. Development of emphysema is seen as an increase in LMI.
  • the potency of a test compound is evaluated by comparison of the tobacco smoke induced increase in LMI in animals dosed with either the test compound or just the vehicle used for administration of the compound.
  • test compounds The potency of test compounds is evaluated by measuring the inhibition of elastolysis induced by human alveolar macrophages.
  • the cells are isolated from bronchoalveolar lavage samples taken from non-smokers, disease-free smokers, and smokers with COPD. Macrophage suspensions are added to test wells coated with tritiated elastin and incubated at 37°C for 3h to allow adherence of the cells. The wells are then carefully washed to remove non-adherent cells and fresh medium is added to each well. The cells are incubated at 37°C for up to 72 hours in the presence or absence of test compound. Every 24 hours the medium in each well is removed for analysis and replaced by fresh medium.
  • Radioactivity released into the medium is measured by liquid scintillation counting and the rate of elastin degradation is calculated.
  • the potency of a test compound is evaluated by comparing the rate of elastolysis measured with cells incubated in the presence or absence of the compound.
  • BALB/c mice are injected with a single intravenous injection of 10 ⁇ g of 145-2C11 (purified hamster anti-mouse CD3 ⁇ monoclonal antibodies, PHARMINGEN).
  • a test compound is administered intraperitoneally 60 min prior to the anti-CD3 mAb injection.
  • Blood is collected 90 minutes after the antibody injection.
  • Serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 r.p.m. for 10 min.
  • IL-2 and IL-4 levels in the serum are determined by an ELISA.
  • mice are injected intravenously with 0.8 mg of purified goat anti-mouse IgD antibody or PBS (defined as day 0). Compound is administered intraperitoneally from day 0 to day 6. On day 7 blood is collected and serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 r.p.m. for 10 min. Serum total levels of IgE are determined by YAM ASA's ELISA kit and their Ig subtypes are done by an Ig ELISA KIT (Rougier Biotech's, Montreal, Canada).
  • mice are injected intraperitoneally with LPS (200 ⁇ g/mouse). Compound is administered intraperitoneally 1 hr before the LPS injection. Blood is collected at 90 min post-LPS injection and plasma is obtained. TNF- ⁇ concentration in the sample is determined using an ELISA kit.
  • BALB/c mice are injected intradermally with a 2.5 ml of air on days -6 and -3 to prepare airpouch.
  • On day 0 compound is admimstered intraperitoneally 60 min before eotaxin injection (3 ⁇ g/mouse, i.d.).
  • IL-5 300 ng/mouse
  • leukocytes in exudate is collected and the number of total cells is counted.
  • the differential cell counts in the exudate are performed by staining with May-Grunwald Gimsa solution.
  • D10.G4.1 cells (1 x 10 cells/mouse) containing 2 mg of conalbumin in saline is admimstered i.v. to AKR mice. After 6 hr blood is collected and serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 r.p.m. for lOmin. IL-4 and IL-5 level in serum are determined by ELISA kits. Compound is administered intraperitoneally at -4 and +1 hr after these cells injection.
  • PCA Passive cutaneous anaphylaxis
  • control rats with sensitization, challenge and vehicle treatment are used to determine a value without inhibition. Thirty min after the challenge, the rats are killed, and the skin of the back is removed. Evans blue dye in the skin is extracted in formamide overnight at 63°C. Then an absorbance at 620 nm is measured to obtain the optical density of the leaked dye.
  • Percent inhibition of PCA with a compound is calculated as follows:
  • % inhibition ⁇ (mean vehicle value - sample value)/(mean vehicle value - mean control value) ⁇ x 100 Anaphylactic bronchoconstriction in rats
  • PIP Pulmonary inflation pressure
  • RNA from each cell or tissue source was first reverse transcribed. Eighty-five ⁇ g of total RNA was reverse transcribed using 1 ⁇ mole random hexamer primers, 0.5 mM each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP and dTTP (Qiagen, Hilden, Germany) and 3000 U RnaseQut (Invitrogen, Groningen, Netherlands) in a final volume of 680 ⁇ l.
  • the first strand synthesis buffer and Omniscript reverse transcriptase (2 u/ ⁇ l) were obtained from (Qiagen, Hilden, Germany). The reaction was incubated at 37°C for 90 minutes and cooled on ice.
  • RNA samples were adjusted to 6800 ⁇ l with water, yielding a final concentration of 12.5 ng/ ⁇ l of starting RNA.
  • Perkin Elmer ABI Prism RTM 7700 Sequence Detection system or Biorad iCycler was used according to the manufacturer's specifications and protocols. PCR reactions were set up to quantitate expression of the test gene and the housekeeping genes HPRT
  • Forward and reverse primers and probes were designed using the Perkin Elmer ABI Primer ExpressTM software and were synthesized by TibMolBiol (Berlin, Germany).
  • the forward primer sequence was: Primerl ccctctccgtgtcctacaag (SEQ ID NO: 11).
  • the reverse primer sequence was Primer2 tcatcgttctcctccaggtt (SEQ ID NO: 12).
  • Probel agggccgcatgatgaaggacatct (SEQ ID NO: 13), labeled with FAM (carboxyfluorescein succinimidyl ester) as the reporter dye and TAMRA (carboxytetramethyhhodamine) as the quencher, was used as a probe.
  • FAM carboxyfluorescein succinimidyl ester
  • TAMRA carboxytetramethyhhodamine
  • the following reagents were prepared in a total of 25 ⁇ l: lx TaqMan buffer A, 5.5 mM MgCl 2 , 200 nM of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, and dUTP, 0.025 U/ ⁇ l AmpliTaq GoldTM, 0.01 VI ⁇ l AmpErase, and Probel agggccgcatgatgaaggacatct, forward and reverse primers each at 200 nM, 200 nM , FAM TAMRA-labeled probe, and 5 ⁇ l of template cDNA. Thermal cycling parameters were 2 min at 50°C, followed by 10 min at 95°C, followed by 40 cycles of melting at 95°C for 15 sec and annealing/extending at 60°C for 1 min.
  • the CT (threshold cycle) value is calculated as described in the "Quantitative determination of nucleic acids" section.
  • the CF-value (factor for threshold cycle conection) is calculated as follows:
  • PCR reactions were set up to quantitate the housekeeping genes (HKG) for each cDNA sample.
  • CT HKG -va ies threshold cycle for housekeeping gene
  • CT HKG - n -mean value (CT ⁇ .G i-value + CT H ⁇ .G2 -value + ... + CT HKG - n -value) / n
  • CTcD NA -n CT value of the tested gene for the cDNA n
  • CF CDNA - ⁇ detection factor for cDNA n
  • CT CO ⁇ - C D N A- ⁇ co ⁇ ected CT value for a gene on cDNA n
  • tissue substantia nigra, temporal lobe, cerebral cortex, parietal lobe, cerebral peduncles, hippocampus, vermis cerebelli, precentral gyrus, occipital lobe, Alzheimer cerebral cortex, Alzheimer brain frontal lobe, tonsilla cerebelli, brain, frontal lobe, cerebellum (left), cerebellum (right), pons, thalamus, rectum, ovary tumor, interventricular septum, coronary artery, Alzheimer brain, bone marrow CD33 + cells, breast, coronary artery sclerotic, corpus callosum, ileum chronic inflammation, lung COPD, fetal kidney, prostate BPH, dorsal root ganglia, pancreas liver cinhosis, heart atrium (right), pancreas liver cinhosis, lung tumor, fetal brain, MDA MB 231 cells (breast tumor), lung right lower lobe, HUVEC cells,
  • HeLa cells (cervix tumor), fetal liver, colon, bladder, salivary gland, thymus, bone manow. The results are shown in Table 1.
  • Apparsundaram S Sung U, Price RD, Blakely RD. Trafficking-Dependent and -Independent Pathways of Neurotransmitter Transporter Regulation Differentially Involving p38 Mitogen- Activated Protein Kinase Revealed in Studies of Insulin Modulation of Norepinephrine Transport in SK-N-SH Cells. J Pharmacol Exp Ther 2001 Nov;299(2):666-77.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Proteomics, Peptides & Aminoacids (AREA)
  • Toxicology (AREA)
  • Zoology (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Biochemistry (AREA)
  • Biophysics (AREA)
  • Genetics & Genomics (AREA)
  • Cell Biology (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Micro-Organisms Or Cultivation Processes Thereof (AREA)
  • Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
  • Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)

Abstract

Reagents that regulate human neurotransmitter transporter and reagents which bind to human neurotransmitter transporter gene products can play a role in preventing, ameliorating, or correcting dysfunctions or diseases including, but not limited to, CNS disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, genitourological disorders, cancer, hematological disorders, cardiovascular disorders, COPD, and asthma.

Description

REGULATION OF HUMAN NEUROTRANSMITTER TRANSPORTER
This application incorporates by reference co-pending US provisional applications Serial No. 60/344,338 filed January 4, 2002 and Serial No. 60/406,301 filed August
8, 2002.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to the regulation of human neurotransmitter transporter.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Affinity neurotransmitter transport is thought to terminate the overall process of synaptic transmission. U.S: Patent 5,759,854; Iversen, Br. J. Pharmacol. 41 :571-
591, 1971. Recently, cDNAs encoding more than ten different neurotransmitter transporters have been cloned and sequenced. The family of these genes could be divided into three subfamilies, including the GABA and taurine transporters (Liu et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA, 89, 6639-43, 1992), the amino acid (glycine and proline) transporters (Fremeau et al, Neuron 8, 915-926, 1992), and the catecholamine transporters (Pacholczyk, T., et al, Nature, 350:350-354, 1991).
The general structure of all these gene products is very similar. They contain twelve potential transmembrane helices and an extended external loop with 3-4 glycosylation sites between membrane segments 3 and 4. The calculated molecular weights of the transporters is about 70 kDa, and both their C- and N-terminal peripheral peptides contain about 40 amino acids and may be located on the cytoplasmic side of the membrane.
In GABA and catecholamine transporter subfamilies, the amino acid sequence of each member is 60-80% identical to the other members within a subfamily and about 40% identical to members between the two subfamilies (Liu et al, 1992). Amino acid transporters, such as the glycine transporter and proline transporter, share about 40-45% homology with all members of the neurotransmitter transporter superfamily. Sequence homology among the members of the neurotransmitter transporter family give clear indication that they evolved from a common ancestral gene. Moreover, partial genomic cloning of several neurotransmitter transporters reveal that in all of them the first intron in the reading frame is located in an identical position (id.).
There is a need in the art. to identify additional neurotransmitter transporters, which can be regulated to provide therapeutic effects.
BRIEF SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
It is an object of the invention to provide reagents and methods of regulating a human neurotransmitter transporter. This and other objects of the invention are provided by one or more of the embodiments described below.
One embodiment of the invention is a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2;
amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5; and the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5.
Yet another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease extracellular matrix degradation. A test compound is contacted with a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2;
amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5; and the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5.
Binding between the test compound and the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is detected. A test compound which binds to the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing extracellular matrix degradation. The agent can work by decreasing the activity of the neurotransmitter transporter.
Another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease extracellular matrix degradation. A test compound is contacted with a polynucleotide encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 ; the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1;
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3; the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LO NO: 3; nύcleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 4; and the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LD NO:4.
Binding of the test compound to the polynucleotide is detected. A test compound which binds to the polynucleotide is identified as a potential agent for decreasing extracellular matrix degradation. The agent can work by decreasing the amount of the neurotransmitter transporter through interacting with the neurotransmitter transporter mRNA.
Another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which regulate extracellular matrix degradation. A test compound is contacted with a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ LD NO: 2; the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2;
amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5; and the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5.
A neurotransmitter transporter activity of the polypeptide is detected. A test com- poimd which increases neurotransmitter transporter activity of the polypeptide relative to neurotransmitter transporter activity in the absence of the test compound is thereby identified as a potential agent for increasing extracellular matrix degradation. A test compound which decreases neurotransmitter transporter activity of the polypeptide relative to neurotransmitter transporter activity in the absence of the test compound is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing extracellular matrix degradation. Even another embodiment of the invention is a method of screening for agents which decrease extracellular matrix degradation. A test compound is contacted with a neurotransmitter transporter product of a polynucleotide which comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 ;
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50%) identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LD NO: 3; the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3;
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50%o identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LD NO: 4; and the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LD NO:4.
Binding of the test compound to the neurotransmitter transporter product is detected. A test compound which binds to the neurotransmitter transporter product is thereby identified as a potential agent for decreasing extracellular matrix degradation.
Still another embodiment of the invention is a method of reducing extracellular matrix degradation. A cell is contacted with a reagent which specifically binds to a polynucleotide encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or the product encoded by the polynucleotide, wherein the polynucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence selected from the group consisting of:
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50%> identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1 ; the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1; nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50%> identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ LD NO: 3; the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 3;
nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50%> identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 4; and the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ED NO: 4.
Neurotransmitter transporter activity in the cell is thereby decreased.
The invention thus provides a human neurotransmitter transporter that can be used to identify test compounds that may act, for example, as activators or inhibitors. Human neurotransmitter transporter and fragments thereof also are useful in raising specific antibodies that can block the protein and effectively reduce its activity.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES •
Fig. 1 shows the .DNA-sequence encoding a neurotransmitter transporter poly- peptide (SEQ ID NO: 3).
Fig. 2 shows the amino acid sequence deduced from the DNA-sequence of Fig.1 (SEQ LD NO: 2).
Fig. 3 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (SEQ ID NO: 1).
Fig. 4 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (SEQ ED NO: 7). Fig. 5 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (SEQ ED NO: 8).
Fig. 6 shows the DNA-sequence encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (SEQ ID NO: 9).
Fig. 7 shows the transmembrane regions of SEQ ED NO: 2.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
The invention relates to an isolated polynucleotide from the group consisting of:
a) a polynucleotide encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected from the group consisting of:
amino acid sequences which are at least about 95 % identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2;
amino acid sequences which are at least about 95 % identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5; and the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5.
b) a polynucleotide comprising the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4;
c) a polynucleotide which hybridizes under stringent conditions to a polynucleotide specified in (a) and (b) and encodes a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide; d) a polynucleotide the sequence of which deviates from the polynucleotide sequences specified in (a) to (c) due to the degeneration of the genetic code and encodes a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide; and
e) a polynucleotide which represents a fragment, derivative or allelic variation of a polynucleotide sequence specified in (a) to (d) and encodes a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
Furthermore, it has been discovered by the present applicant that a novel neurotransmitter transporter, particularly a human neurotransmitter transporter, can be used in therapeutic methods to treat CNS disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, genitourological disorders, cancer, a hematological disorders, cardiovascular disorders, COPD and asthma. Human neurotransmitter transporter comprises the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2. A DNA sequence harboring the coding sequence (ORF) for human neurotransmitter transporter and located on chromosome lpl3.3is shown in SEQ ID NO: 1. The ORF is shown in SEQ ID
NO: 3. A variant of the human neurotransmitter transporter is shown in SEQ ID
NO: 5. A DNA sequence encoding the human neurotransmitter transporter is shown in SEQ ID NO: 4. Related ESTs (SEQ ID NOs: 7-9) are expressed in pancreas (insulinoma), testis, and normal nervous tissue.
Blast results show homology to a rat orphan sodium- and chloride-dependent neurotransmitter transporter NTT4 (94% identity with e-value of 0.0 over 744 amino acids) and a rat renal osmotic stress-induced NaCl organic solute cotransporter (41% identity with e-value of 5e-141 over 616 amino acids). The rat orphan, sodium- and chloride-dependent neurotransmitter transporter NTT4 is shown in SEQ ID NO: 6). Both pfam and prosite searches identify sodium neurotransmitter symporter family regions (from residues 84 to 99 and from residues 167 to 188 of SEQ ID NO: 2). The C residue for disulfide bond is conserved in the sequence. The 12 transmembrane regions can be seen in FIG. 7. Human neurotransmitter transporter of the invention is expected to be useful for the same purposes as previously identified neurotransmitter reporters. Human neurotransmitter transporter is believed to be useful in therapeutic methods to treat disorders such as CNS disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, genitourological disorders, cancer, hematological disorders, cardiovascular disorders, COPD, and asthma. Human neurotransmitter transporter also can be used to screen for human neurotransmitter transporter activators and inhibitors.
Polypeptides
Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides according to the invention comprise at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 744 contiguous amino acids selected from the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 750 or 795 contiguous amino acids selected from the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5 or a biologically active variant thereof, as defined below. A neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide of the invention therefore can be a portion of a neurotransmitter transporter protein, a full-length neurotransmitter transporter protein, or a fusion protein comprising all or a portion of a neurotransmitter transporter protein.
Biologically active variants
Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide variants which are biologically active, e.g., retain an enzymatic activity, also are human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides. Preferably, naturally or non-naturally occurring human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide variants have amino acid sequences which are at least about 95, 96, 97, 98, or 99% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or 5 or a fragment thereof. Percent identity between a putative human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide variant and an amino acid sequence of SEQ
ID NO: 2 or 5 is determined by conventional methods. See, for example, Altschul et al., Bull Math. Bio. 48:603 (1986), and Henikoff & Henikoff, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. USA 5P:10915 (1992). Briefly, two amino acid sequences are aligned to optimize the alignment scores using a gap opening penalty of 10, a gap extension penalty of 1, and the "BLOSUM62" scoring matrix of Henikoff & Henikoff, 1992.
Those skilled in the art appreciate that there are many established algorithms available to align two amino acid sequences. The "FASTA" similarity search algorithm of Pearson & Lipman is a suitable protein alignment method for examining the level of identity shared by an amino acid sequence disclosed herein and the amino acid sequence of a putative variant. The FASTA algorithm is described by
Pearson & Lipman, Proc. Nat'l Acad. Sci. USA 55:2444(1988), and by Pearson, Meth. Enzymol. 183:63 (1990). Briefly, FASTA first characterizes sequence similarity by identifying regions shared by the query sequence (e.g., SEQ ID NO: 2 or 5) and a test sequence that have either the highest density of identities (if the ktup variable is 1) or pairs of identities (if ktup=2), without considering conservative amino acid substitutions, insertions, or deletions. The ten regions with the highest density of identities are then rescored by comparing the similarity of all paired amino acids using an amino acid substitution matrix, and the ends of the regions are "trimmed" to include only those residues that contribute to the highest score. If there are several regions with scores greater than the "cutoff value (calculated by a predetermined formula based upon the length of the sequence the ktup value), then the trimmed initial regions are examined to determine whether the regions can be joined to form an approximate alignment with gaps. Finally, the highest scoring regions of the two amino acid sequences are aligned using a modification of the Needleman- Wunsch- Sellers algorithm (Needleman & Wunsch, J. Mol. Biol.48:444
(1970); Sellers, SLAM J. Appl. Math.26:7&7 (1974)), which allows for amino acid insertions and deletions. Preferred parameters for FASTA analysis are: ktup=l, gap opening penalty=10, gap extension penalty=l, and substitution matrix=BLOSUM62. These parameters can be introduced into a FASTA program by modifying the scoring matrix file ("SMATRIX"), as explained in Appendix 2 of Pearson, Meth. Enzymol
183:63 (1990). FASTA can also be used to determine the sequence identity of nucleic acid molecules using a ratio as disclosed above. For nucleotide sequence comparisons, the ktup value can range between one to six, preferably from three to six, most preferably three, with other parameters set as default.
Variations in percent identity can be due, for example, to amino acid substitutions, insertions, or deletions. Amino acid substitutions are defined as one for one amino acid replacements. They are conservative in nature when the substituted amino acid has similar structural and/or chemical properties. Examples of conservative replacements are substitution of a leucine with an isoleucine or valine, an aspartate with a glutamate, or a threonine with a serine.
Amino acid insertions or deletions are changes to or within an amino acid sequence. They typically fall in the range of about 1 to 5 amino acids. Guidance in determining which amino acid residues can be substituted, inserted, or deleted without abolishing biological or immunological activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be found using computer programs well known in the art, such as DNASTAR software.
The invention additionally, encompasses neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides that are differentially modified during or after translation, e.g., by glycosylation, acetylation, phosphorylation, amidation, derivatization by known protecting/blocking groups, proteolytic cleavage, linkage to an antibody molecule or other cellular ligand, etc. Any of numerous chemical modifications can be carried out by known techniques including, but not limited, to specific chemical cleavage by cyanogen bromide, trypsin, chymotrypsin, papain, V8 protease, NaBH , acetylation, formyla- tion, oxidation, reduction, metabolic synthesis in the presence of tunicamycin, etc.
Additional post-translational modifications encompassed by the invention include, for example, e.g., N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, processing of N- terminal or C-terminal ends), attachment of chemical moieties to the amino acid backbone, chemical modifications of N-linked or O-linked carbohydrate chains, and addition or deletion of an N-terminal methionine residue as a result of prokaryotic host cell expression. The neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides may also be modified with a detectable label, such as an enzymatic, fluorescent, isotopic or affinity label to allow for detection and isolation of the protein.
The invention also provides chemically modified derivatives of neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides that may provide additional advantages such as increased solubility, stability and circulating time of the polypeptide, or decreased immuno- genicity (see U.S. Patent No. 4,179,337). The chemical moieties for derivitization can be selected from water soluble polymers such as polyethylene glycol, ethylene glycol/propylene glycol copolymers, carboxymethylcellulose, dextran, polyvinyl alcohol, and the like. The polypeptides can be modified at random or predetermined positions within the molecule and can include one, two, three, or more attached chemical moieties.
Whether an amino acid change or a polypeptide modification results in a biologically active neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can readily be determined by assaying for neurotransmitter uptake, as is known in the art.
Fusion proteins
Fusion proteins are useful for generating antibodies against neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide amino acid sequences and for use in various assay systems.
For example, fusion proteins can be used to identify proteins that interact with portions of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. Protein affinity chromatography or library-based assays for protein-protein interactions, such as the yeast two-hybrid or phage display systems, can be used for this purpose. Such methods are well known in the art and also can be used as drug screens. A human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide fusion protein comprises two polypeptide segments fused together by means of a peptide bond. The first polypeptide segment comprises at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 744 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ED NO: 2 or at least 6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275,
300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 750 or 795 contiguous amino acids of SEQ ID NO: 5 or of a biologically active variant, such as those described above. The first polypeptide segment also can comprise full-length neurotransmitter transporter protein.
The second polypeptide segment can be a full-length protein or a protein fragment.
Proteins commonly used in fusion protein construction include β-galactosidase, β- glucuronidase, green fluorescent protein (GFP), autofluorescent proteins, including blue fluorescent protein (BFP), glutathione-S-transferase (GST), luciferase, horseradish peroxidase (HRP), and chloramphenicol acetyltransferase (CAT). Addition- ally, epitope tags are used in fusion protein constructions, including histidine (His) tags, FLAG tags, influenza hemagglutinin (HA) tags, Myc tags, VSV-G tags, and thioredoxin (Trx) tags. Other fusion constructions can include maltose binding protein (MBP), S-tag, Lex a DNA binding domain (DBD) fusions, GAL4 DNA binding domain fusions, and herpes simplex virus (HSV) BP16 protein fusions. A fusion protein also can be engineered to contain a cleavage site located between the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide-encoding sequence and the heterologous protein sequence, so that the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be cleaved and purified away from the heterologous moiety.
A fusion protein can be synthesized chemically, as is known in the art. Preferably, a fusion protein is produced by covalently linking two polypeptide segments or by standard procedures in the art of molecular biology. Recombinant DNA methods can be used to prepare fusion proteins, for example, by. making a DNA construct which comprises coding sequences selected from SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4 in proper reading frame with nucleotides encoding the second polypeptide segment and expressing the DNA construct in a host cell, as is known in the art. Many kits for constructing fusion proteins are available from companies such as Promega Corporation (Madison, WI), Stratagene (La Jolla, CA), CLONTECH (Mountain View, CA), Santa Cruz Biotechnology (Santa Cruz, CA), MBL International Corporation (MIC; Watertown, MA), and Quantum Biotechnologies (Montreal, Canada; 1-888-DNA-KITS).
Identification of species homologs
Species homologs of human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be obtained using neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide polynucleotides (described below) to make suitable probes or primers for screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast, identifying cDNAs which encode homologs of neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, and expressing the cDNAs as is known in the art.
Polynucleotides
A human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be single- or double- stranded and comprises a coding sequence or the complement of a coding sequence for a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. A coding sequence for human neurotransmitter transporter is shown in SEQ ID NOs: 3 and 4.
Degenerate nucleotide sequences encoding human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides, as well as homologous nucleotide sequences which are at least about 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, preferably about 75, 90, 96, 98, or 99% identical to the nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4 or its complement also are neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. Percent sequence identity between the sequences of two polynucleotides is determined using computer programs such as ALIGN which employ the FASTA algorithm, using an affine gap search with a gap open penalty of -12 and a gap extension penalty of -2. Complementary DNA (cDNA) molecules, species homologs, and variants of neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides that encode biologically active neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides also are neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. Polynucleotide fragments comprising at least 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 15, 20, or 25 contiguous nucleotides of SEQ ED NO: 1, 3 or 4 or its complement also are neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. These fragments, can be used, for example, as hybridization probes or as antisense oligonucleotides.
Identification of polynucleotide variants and homologs
Variants and homologs of the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides described above also are neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. Typically, homologous neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide sequences can be identified by hybridization of candidate polynucleotides to known neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides under stringent conditions, as is known in the art. For example, using the following wash conditions— 2X SSC (0.3 M NaCl, 0.03 M sodium citrate, pH 7.0), 0.1% SDS, room temperature twice, 30 minutes each; then 2X SSC, 0.1% SDS, 50°C once, 30 minutes; then 2X SSC, room temperature twice, 10 minutes each—homologous sequences can be identified which contain at most about 25-30%> basepair mismatches. More preferably, homologous nucleic acid strands contain 15-25%) basepair mismatches, even more preferably 5-15% basepair mismatches.
Species homologs of the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides disclosed herein also can be identified by making suitable probes or primers and screening cDNA expression libraries from other species, such as mice, monkeys, or yeast. Human variants of neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides can be identified, for example, by screening human cDNA expression libraries. It is well known that the Tm of a double-stranded DNA decreases by 1-1.5°C with every 1% decrease in homology (Bonner et al., J. Mol. Biol. 81, 123 (1973). Variants of human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides or neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides of other species can therefore be identified by hybridizing a putative homologous neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide with a polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4 or the complement thereof to form a test hybrid. The melting temperature of the test hybrid is compared with the melting temperature of a hybrid comprising polynucleotides having perfectly complementary nucleotide sequences, and the number or percent of basepair mismatches within the test hybrid is calculated.
Nucleotide sequences which hybridize to neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides or their complements following stringent hybridization and or wash conditions also are neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. Stringent wash conditions are well known and understood in the art and are disclosed, for example, in Sambrook et al, MOLECULAR CLONING: A LABORATORY MANUAL, 2d ed., 1989, at pages 9.50-9.51.
Typically, for stringent hybridization conditions a combination of temperature and salt concentration should be chosen that is approximately 12-20°C below the calculated Tm of the hybrid under study. The Tm of a hybrid between a neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide having a nucleotide sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4 or the complement thereof and a polynucleotide sequence which is at least about 50, preferably about 75, 90, 96, or 98% identical to one of those nucleotide sequences can be calculated, for example, using the equation of
Bolton and McCarthy, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 48, 1390 (1962):
Tm = 81.5°C - 16.6(log10[Na+]) + 0.41(%G + C) - 0.63(%formamide) - 600//), where / = the length of .the hybrid in basepairs.
Stringent wash conditions include, for example, 4X SSC at 65°C, or 50% formamide, 4X SSC at 42°C, or 0.5X SSC, 0.1% SDS at 65°C. Highly stringent wash conditions include, for example, 0.2X SSC at 65°C. Preparation of polynucleotides
A human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be isolated free of other cellular components such as membrane components, proteins, and lipids. Poly- nucleotides can be made by a cell and isolated using standard nucleic acid purification techniques, or synthesized using an amplification technique, such as the polymerase chain reaction (PCR), or by using an automatic synthesizer. Methods for isolating polynucleotides are routine and are known in the art. Any such technique for obtaining a polynucleotide can be used to obtain isolated neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. For example, restriction enzymes and probes can be used to isolate polynucleotide fragments, which comprise neurotransmitter transporter nucleotide sequences. Isolated polynucleotides are in preparations that are free or at least 70, 80, or 90% free of other molecules.
Human neurotransmitter transporter cDNA molecules can be made with standard molecular biology techniques, using neurotransmitter transporter mRNA as a template. Human neurotransmitter transporter cDNA molecules can thereafter be replicated using molecular biology techniques known in the art and disclosed in manuals such as Sambrook et al. (1989). An amplification technique, such as PCR, can be used to obtain additional copies of polynucleotides of the invention, using either human genomic DNA or cDNA as a template.
Alternatively, synthetic chemistry techniques can be used to synthesize neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. The degeneracy of the genetic code allows alternate nucleotide sequences to be synthesized which will encode a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide having, for example, an amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or 5 or a biologically active variant thereof. Extending polynucleotides
Various PCR-based methods can be used to extend the nucleic acid sequences disclosed herein to detect upstream sequences such as promoters and regulatory elements. For example, restriction-site PCR uses universal primers to retrieve unknown sequence adjacent to a known locus (Sarkar, PCR Methods Applic. 2, 318-322, 1993). Genomic DNA is first amplified in the presence of a primer to a linker sequence and a primer specific to the known region. The amplified sequences are then subjected to a second round of PCR with the same linker primer and another specific primer internal to the first one. Products of each round of PCR are transcribed with an appropriate RNA polymerase and sequenced using reverse transcriptase.
Inverse PCR also can be used to amplify or extend sequences using divergent primers based on a known region (Triglia et al, Nucleic Acids Res. 16, 8186, 1988). Primers can be designed using commercially available software, such as OLIGO 4.06 Primer
Analysis software (National Biosciences Inc., Plymouth, Minn.), to be 22-30 nucleotides in length, to have a GC content of 50% or more, and to anneal to the target sequence at temperatures about 68-72°C. The method uses several restriction enzymes to generate a suitable fragment in the known region of a gene. The fragment is then circularized by intramolecular ligation and used as a PCR template.
Another method which can be used is capture PCR, which involves PCR amplification of DNA fragments adjacent to a known sequence in human and yeast artificial chromosome DNA (Lagerstrom et al, PCR Methods Applic. 1, 111-119, 1991). In this method, multiple restriction enzyme digestions and ligations also can be used to place an engineered double-stranded sequence into an unknown fragment of the DNA molecule before performing PCR.
Another method which can be used to retrieve unknown sequences is that of Parker et al, Nucleic Acids Res. 19, 3055-3060, 1991). Additionally, PCR, nested primers, and PROMOTERFINDER libraries (CLONTECH, Palo Alto, Calif.) can be used to walk genomic DNA (CLONTECH, Palo Alto, Calif.). This process avoids the need to screen libraries and is useful in finding intron/exon junctions.
When screening for full-length cDNAs, it is preferable to use libraries that have been size-selected to include larger cDNAs. Randomly-primed libraries are preferable, in that they will contain more sequences which contain the 5' regions of genes. Use of a randomly primed library may be especially preferable for situations in which an oligo d(T) library does not yield a full-length cDNA. Genomic libraries can be useful for extension of sequence into 5' non-transcribed regulatory regions.
Commercially available capillary electrophoresis systems can be used to analyze the size or confirm the nucleotide sequence of PCR or sequencing products. For example, capillary sequencing can employ flowable polymers for electrophoretic separation, four different fluorescent dyes (one for each nucleotide) that are laser activated, and detection of the emitted wavelengths by a charge coupled device camera. Output/light intensity can be converted to electrical signal using appropriate software (e.g. GENOTYPER and Sequence NAVIGATOR, Perkin Elmer), and the entire process from loading of samples to computer analysis and electronic data display can be computer controlled. Capillary electrophoresis is especially preferable for the sequencing of small pieces of DNA that might be present in limited amounts in a particular sample.
Obtaining Polynucleotides
Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be obtained, for example, by purification from - human cells, by expression of neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides, or by direct chemical synthesis. Protein purification
Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be purified from any human cell which expresses the receptor, including host cells which have been transfected with neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotides. A purified neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is separated from other compounds that normally associate with the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide in the cell, such as certain proteins, carbohydrates, or lipids, using methods well-known in the art. Such methods include, but are not limited to, size exclusion chromatography, ammonium sulfate fractionation, ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, and preparative gel electrophoresis.
Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be conveniently isolated as a complex with its associated G protein, as described in the specific examples, below. A preparation of purified neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides is at least 80% pure; preferably, the preparations are 90%), 95%, or 99%) pure. Purity of the preparations can be assessed by any means known in the art, such as SDS-poly- acrylamide gel electrophoresis.
Expression of polynucleotides
To express a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide, the polynucleotide can be inserted into an expression vector which contains the necessary elements for the transcription and translation of the inserted coding sequence. Methods which are well known to those skilled in the art can be used to construct expression vectors containing sequences encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides and appropriate transcriptional and translational control elements. These methods include in vitro recombinant DNA techniques, synthetic techniques, and in vivo genetic recombination. Such techniques are described, for example, in Sambrook et al. (1989) and in Ausubel et al, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, New York, N.Y, 1989. A variety of expression vector/host systems can be utilized to contain and express sequences encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. These include, but .are not limited to, microorganisms, such as bacteria transformed with recombinant bacteriophage, plasmid, or cosmid DNA expression vectors; yeast transformed with yeast expression vectors, insect cell systems infected with virus expression vectors (e.g., baculovirus), plant cell systems transformed with virus expression vectors (e.g., cauliflower mosaic virus, CaMV; '■ tobacco mosaic virus, TMV) or with bacterial expression vectors (e.g., Ti or pBR322 plasmids), or animal cell systems.
The control elements or regulatory sequences are those non-translated regions of the vector — enhancers, promoters, 5' and 3' untranslated regions — which interact with host cellular proteins to carry out transcription and translation. Such elements can vary iri their strength and specificity. Depending on the vector system and host utilized, any number of suitable transcription and translation elements, including constitutive and inducible promoters, can be used. For example, when cloning in bacterial systems, inducible promoters such as the hybrid lacZ promoter of the BLUESCRIPT phagemid (Stratagene, LaJolla, Calif.) or pSPORTl plasmid (Life Technologies) and the like can be used. The baculovirus polyhedrin promoter can be used in insect cells. Promoters or enhancers derived from the genomes of plant cells (e.g., heat shock, RUBISCO, and storage protein genes) or from plant viruses (e.g., viral promoters or leader sequences) can be cloned into the vector. In mammalian cell systems, promoters from mammalian genes or from mammalian viruses are preferable. If it is necessary to generate a cell line that contains multiple copies of a nucleotide sequence encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, vectors based on SV40 or EBV can be used with an appropriate selectable marker. Bacterial and yeast expression systems
In bacterial systems, a number of expression vectors can be selected depending upon the use intended for the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. For example, when a large quantity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is needed for the induction of antibodies, vectors which direct high level expression of fusion proteins that are readily purified can be used. Such vectors include, but are not limited to, multifunctional E. coli cloning and expression vectors such as BLUES CREPT (Stratagene). In a BLUESCRIPT vector, a sequence encoding the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be ligated into the vector in frame with sequences for the amino-terminal Met and the subsequent 7 residues of β-galactosidase so that a hybrid protein is produced. pIN vectors (Van Heeke & Schuster, J Biol Chem. 264, 5503-5509, 1989) or pGEX vectors (Promega, Madison, Wis.) also can be used to express foreign polypeptides as fusion proteins with glutathione S-transferase (GST). In general, such fusion proteins are soluble and can easily be purified from lysed cells by adsorption to glutathione-agarose beads followed by elution in the presence of free glutathione. Proteins made in such systems can be designed to include heparin, thrombin, or factor Xa protease cleavage sites so that the cloned polypeptide of interest can be released from the GST moiety at will.
In the yeast Saccharomyces cerevisiae, a number of vectors containing constitutive or inducible promoters such as alpha factor, alcohol oxidase, and PGH can be used. For reviews, see Ausubel et αl. (1989) and Grant et αl, Methods Enzymol. 153, 516-544, 1987.
Plant and insect expression systems
If plant expression vectors are used, the expression of sequences encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be driven by any of a number of promoters. For example, viral promoters such as the 35S and 19S promoters of CaMV can be used alone or in combination with the omega leader sequence from TMV (Takamatsu, EMBO J. 6, 307-311, 1987). Alternatively, plant promoters such as the small subunit of RUBISCO or heat shock promoters can be used (Coruzzi et al, EMBO J. 3, 1671-1680, 1984; Broglie et al, Science 224, 838-843, 1984; Winter et al, Results Probl. Cell Differ. 17, 85-105, 1991). These constructs can be introduced into plant cells by direct DNA transformation or by pathogen-mediated transfection.
Such techniques are described in a number of generally available reviews (e.g., Hobbs or Murray, in MCGRAW HILL YEARBOOK OF SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY, McGraw Hill, New York, N.Y:, pp. 191-196, 1992).
An insect system also can be used to express a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. For example, . in one such system Autographa californica nuclear polyhedrosis virus (AcNPV) is used as a vector to express foreign genes in Spodoptera frugiperda cells or in Trichoplusia larvae. Sequences encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be cloned into a non-essential region of the virus, such as the polyhedrin gene, and placed under control of the polyhedrin promoter. Successful insertion of neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides will render the polyhedrin gene inactive and produce recombinant virus lacking coat protein. The recombinant viruses can then be used to infect S. frugiperda cells or Trichoplusia larvae in which neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be expressed (Engelhard et al, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 91, 3224-3227, 1994).
Mammalian expression systems
A number of viral-based expression systems can be used to express neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides in mammalian host cells. For example, if an adenovirus is used as an expression vector, sequences encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be ligated into an adenovirus transcription/translation complex comprising the late promoter and tripartite leader sequence. Insertion in a non-essential El or E3 region of the viral genome can be used to obtain a viable virus which is capable of expressing a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide in infected host cells (Logan & Shenk, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 81, 3655-3659, 1984). If desired, transcription enhancers, such as the Rous sarcoma virus (RSV) enhancer, can be used to increase expression in mammalian host cells.
Human artificial chromosomes (HACs) also can be used to deliver larger fragments of DNA than can be contained and expressed in a plasmid. HACs of 6M to 10M are constructed and delivered to cells via conventional delivery methods (e.g., liposomes, polycationic amino polymers, or vesicles).
Specific initiation signals also can be used to achieve more efficient translation of sequences encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides. Such signals include the ATG initiation codon and adjacent sequences. In cases where sequences encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, its initiation codon, and upstream sequences are inserted into the appropriate expression vector, no additional transcriptional or translational control signals may be needed. However, in cases where only coding sequence, or a fragment thereof, is inserted, exogenous translational control signals (including the ATG initiation codon) should be provided.
The initiation codon should be in the correct reading frame to ensure translation of the entire insert. Exogenous translational elements and initiation codons can be of various origins, both natural and synthetic. The efficiency of expression can be enhanced by the inclusion of enhancers which are appropriate for the particular cell system which is used (see Scharf et al, Results Probl Cell Differ. 20, 125-162,
1994).
Host cells
A host cell strain can be chosen for its ability to modulate the expression of the inserted sequences or to process the expressed neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide in the desired fashion. Such modifications of the polypeptide include, but are not limited to, acetylation, carboxylation, glycosylation, phosphorylation, lipidation, and acylation. Post-translational processing which cleaves a "prepro" form of the polypeptide also can be used to facilitate correct insertion, folding and/or function. Different host cells that have specific cellular machinery and characteristic mechanisms for post-translational activities (e.g., CHO, HeLa, MDCK, HEK293, and WI38) are available from the American Type Culture Collection (ATCC; 10801 University Boulevard, Manassas, VA 20110-2209) and can be chosen to ensure the correct modification and processing of the foreign protein.
Stable expression is preferred for long-term, high-yield production of recombinant proteins. For example, cell lines which stably express neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be transformed using expression vectors which can contain viral origins of replication and/or endogenous expression elements and a selectable marker gene on the same or on a separate vector. Following the introduction of the vector, cells can be allowed to grow for 1-2 days in an enriched medium before they are switched to a selective medium. The purpose of the selectable marker is to confer resistance to selection, and its presence allows growth and recovery of cells that successfully express the introduced neurotransmitter transporter sequences. Resistant clones of stably transformed cells can be proliferated using tissue culture .techniques appropriate to the cell type. See, for example, ANIMAL CELL CULTURE, R.I. Freshney, ed., 1986.
Any number of selection systems can be used to recover transformed cell lines.
These include, but are not limited to, the herpes simplex virus thymidine kinase (Wigler et al., Cell 11, 223-32, 1977) and adenine phosphoribosylτransferase (Lowy et al., Cell 22, 817-23, 1980) genes that can be employed in tk" or aprf cells, respectively. Also, antimetabolite, antibiotic, or herbicide resistance can be used as the basis for selection. For example, dhfr confers resistance to methotrexate (Wigler et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 77, 3567-70, 1980), npt confers resistance to the aminoglycosides, neomycin and G-418 (Colbere-Garapin et al, J. Mol Biol 150, 1-14, 1981), and als and pat confer resistance to chlorsulfuron and phosphinotricin acetyltransferase, respectively (Murray, 1992, supra). Additional selectable genes have been described. For example, trpB allows cells to utilize indole in place of tryptophan, or hisD, which allows cells to utilize histinol in place of histidine (Hartman & Mulligan, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 85, 8047-51, 1988). Visible markers such as anthocyanins, β-glucuronidase and its substrate GUS, and luciferase and its substrate luciferin, can be used to identify transformants and to quantify the amount of transient or stable protein expression attributable to a specific vector system (Rhodes et al, Methods Mol. Biol. 55, 121-131, 1995).
Detecting expression
Although the presence of marker gene expression suggests that the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide is also present, its presence and expression may need to be confirmed. For example, if a sequence encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is inserted within a marker gene sequence, transformed cells containing sequences which encode an neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be identified by the absence of marker gene function. Alternatively, a marker gene can be placed in tandem with a sequence encoding an neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide under the control of a single promoter. Expression of the marker gene in response to induction or selection usually indicates expression of the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide.
Alternatively, host cells which contain a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide and which express a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be identified by a variety of procedures known to those of skill in the art. These procedures include, but are not limited to, DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridizations and protein bioassay or immunoassay techniques that include membrane, solution, or chip-based technologies for the detection and/or quantification of nucleic acid or protein. For example, the presence of a polynucleotide sequence encoding an neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be detected by DNA-DNA or DNA-RNA hybridization or amplification using probes or fragments or fragments of polynucleotides encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. Nucleic acid amplification-based assays involve the use of oligonucleotides selected from sequences encoding an neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide to detect transformants which contain an neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide.
A variety of protocols for detecting and measuring the expression of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, using either polyclonal or monoclonal antibodies specific for the polypeptide, are known in the art. Examples include enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay (ELISA), radioimmunoassay (RIA), and fluorescence activated cell sorting (FACS). A two-site, monoclonal-based immunoassay using monoclonal antibodies reactive to two non-interfering epitopes on a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be used, or a competitive binding assay can be employed. These and other assays are described in Hampton et al, SEROLOGICAL METHODS: A LABORATORY MANUAL, APS Press, St. Paul, Minn, 1990) and Maddox et α/, J Exp. Med. 158, 1211-1216, 1983).
A wide variety of labels and conjugation techniques are known by those skilled in the art and can be used in various nucleic acid and amino acid assays. Means for producing labeled hybridization or PCR probes for detecting sequences related to polynucleotides encoding neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides include oligolabeling, nick translation, end-labeling, or PCR amplification using a labeled nucleotide. Alternatively, sequences encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be cloned into a vector for the production of an mRNA probe. Such vectors are known in the art, are commercially available, and can be used to synthesize RNA probes in vitro by addition of labeled nucleotides and an appropriate RNA polymerase such as T7, T3, or SP6. These procedures can be conducted using a variety of commercially available kits (Amersham Pharmacia Biotech, Promega, and US Biochemical). Suitable reporter molecules or labels which can be used for ease of detection include radionuclides, enzymes, and fluorescent, chemiluminescent, or chromogenic agents, as well as substrates, cofactors, inhibitors, magnetic particles, and the like. Expression and purification of polypeptides
Host cells transformed with nucleotide sequences encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be cultured under conditions suitable for the expression and recovery of the protein from cell culture. The polypeptide produced by a transformed cell can be secreted or contained intracellularly depending on the sequence and/or the vector used. As will be understood by those of skill in the art, expression vectors containing polynucleotides which encode neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be designed to contain signal sequences which direct secretion of soluble neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides through a prokaryotic or eukaryotic cell membrane or which direct the membrane insertion of membrane- bound neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
As discussed above, other constructions can be used to join a sequence encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide to a nucleotide sequence encoding a polypeptide domain which will facilitate purification of soluble proteins. Such purification facilitating domains include, but are not limited to, metal chelating peptides such as histidine-tryptophan modules that allow purification on immobilized . metals, protein A domains that allow purification on immobilized immunoglobulin, and the domain utilized in the FLAGS extension/affinity purification system
(Immunex Corp, Seattle, Wash.). Inclusion of cleavable linker sequences such as those specific for Factor Xa or enterokinase (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) between the purification domain and the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide also can be used
. to facilitate purification. One such expression vector provides for expression of a fusion protein containing a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide and 6 histidine residues preceding a thioredoxin or an enterokinase cleavage site. The histidine residues facilitate purification by IMAC (immobilized metal ion affinity chromatography, as described in Porath et al., Prot. Exp. Purifi 3, 263-281, 1992), while the enterokinase cleavage site provides a means for purifying the neuro- ' transmitter transporter polypeptide from the fusion protein. Vectors that contain fusion proteins are disclosed in Kroll et al, DNA Cell Biol 12, 441-453, 1993. Chemical synthesis
Sequences encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be synthesized, in whole or in part, using chemical methods well known in the art (see
Caruthers et al, Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 215-223, 1980; Horn et al. Nucl. Acids Res. Symp. Ser. 225-232, 1980). Alternatively, a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide itself can be produced using chemical methods to synthesize its amino acid sequence, such as by direct peptide synthesis using solid-phase techniques (Merrifield, J Am. Chem. Soc. 85, 2149-2154, 1963; Roberge et al, Science 269,
202-204, 1995). Protein synthesis can be performed using manual techniques or by automation. Automated synthesis' can be achieved, for example, using Applied Biosystems 431 A Peptide Synthesizer (Perkin Elmer). Optionally, fragments of neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be separately synthesized and combined using chemical methods to produce a full-length molecule.
The newly synthesized peptide can be substantially purified by preparative high performance liquid chromatography (e.g., Creighton, PROTEINS: STRUCTURES AND MOLECULAR PRINCIPLES, WH Freeman and Co, New York, N.Y, 1983). The composition of a synthetic neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be confirmed by amino acid analysis or sequencing (e.g., the Edman degradation procedure; see Creighton, supra). Additionally, any portion of the amino acid sequence of the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be altered during direct synthesis and/or combined using chemical methods with sequences from other proteins to produce a variant polypeptide or a fusion protein.
As will be understood by those of skill in the art, it may be advantageous to produce neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide-encoding nucleotide sequences possessing non-naturally occurring codons. For example, codons preferred by a particular prokaryotic or eukaryotic host can be selected to increase the rate of protein expression or to produce an RNA transcript having desirable properties, such as a half-life which is longer than that of a transcript generated from the naturally occurring sequence.
The nucleotide sequences disclosed herein can be engineered using methods generally known in the art to alter neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide-encoding sequences for a variety of reasons, including but not limited to, alterations which modify the cloning, processing, and/or expression of the polypeptide or mRNA product. DNA shuffling by random fragmentation and PCR reassembly of gene fragments and synthetic oligonucleotides can be used to engineer the nucleotide sequences. For example, site-directed mutagenesis can be used to insert new restriction sites, alter glycosylation patterns, change codon preference, produce splice variants, introduce mutations, and so forth.
Antibodies
Any type of antibody known in the art can be generated to bind specifically to an epitope of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. "Antibody" as used herein includes intact immunoglobulin molecules, as well as fragments thereof, such as Fab, F(ab')2, and Fv, which are capable of binding an epitope of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. Typically, at least 6, 8, 10, or 12 contiguous amino acids are required to form an epitope. However, epitopes which involve non-contiguous amino acids may require more, e.g., at least 15, 25, or 50 amino acids.
An antibody which specifically binds to an epitope of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be used therapeutically, as well as in immunochemical assays, such as Western blots, ELISAs, radiqimmunoassays, immunohistochemical assays, immunoprecipitations, or other immunochemical assays known in the art. Various immunoassays can be used to identify antibodies having the desired specificity. Numerous protocols for competitive binding or immunoradiometric assays are well known in the art. Such immunoassays typically involve the measurement of complex formation between an immunogen and an antibody that specifically binds to the immunogen.
Typically, an antibody that specifically binds to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide provides a detection signal at least 5-, 10-, or 20-fold higher than a detection signal provided with other proteins when used in an immunochemical assay. Preferably, antibodies that specifically bind to neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides do not detect other proteins in immunochemical assays and can immunoprecipitate a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide from solution.
Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides can be used to immunize a mammal, such as a mouse, rat, rabbit, guinea pig, monkey, or human, to produce polyclonal antibodies. If desired, a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be conjugated to a carrier protein, such as bovine serum albumin, thyroglobulin, and keyhole limpet hemocyanin. Depending on the host species, various adjuvants can be used to increase the immunological response. Such adjuvants include, but are not limited to, Freund's adjuvant, mineral gels (e.g., aluminum hydroxide), and surface active substances (e.g. lysolecithin, pluronic polyols, polyanions, peptides, oil emulsions, keyhole limpet hemocyanin, and dinitrophenol). Among adjuvants used in humans, BCG (bacilli Calmette-Guerin) and Corynebacterium parvum are especially useful. .
Monoclonal antibodies that specifically bind to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be prepared using any technique which provides for the production of antibody molecules by continuous cell lines in culture. These techniques include, but are not limited to, the hybridoma technique, the human B-cell hybridoma technique, and the EBV-hybridoma technique (Kohler et al, Nature 256, 495-497, 1985; Kozbor et al, J. Immunol. Methods 81, 31-42, 1985; Cote et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 80, 2026-2030, 1983; Cole et al, Mol. Cell Biol 62, 109-120, 1984). In addition, techniques developed for the production of "chimeric antibodies," the splicing of mouse antibody genes to human antibody genes to obtain a molecule with appropriate antigen specificity and biological activity, can be used (Morrison et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 81, 6851-6855, 1984; Neuberger et al, Nature 312, 604-608, 1984; Takeda et al, Nature 314, 452-454, 1985). Monoclonal and other antibodies also can be "humanized" to prevent a patient from mounting an immune response against the antibody when it is used therapeutically. Such antibodies may be sufficiently similar in sequence to human antibodies to be used directly in therapy or may require alteration of a few key residues. Sequence differences between rodent antibodies and human sequences can be minimized by replacing residues which differ from those in the human sequences by site directed mutagenesis of individual residues or by grating of entire complementarity determimng regions. Alternatively, humanized antibodies can be produced using recombinant methods, as described in GB2188638B. Antibodies that specifically bind to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can contain antigen binding sites which are either partially or fully humanized, as disclosed in U.S. 5,565,332.
Alternatively, techniques described for the production of single chain antibodies can be adapted using methods known in the art to produce single chain antibodies that specifically bind to neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides. Antibodies with related specificity, but of distinct idiotypic composition, can be generated by chain shuffling from random combinatorial immunoglobin libraries (Burton, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 88, 11120-23, 1991).
Single-chain antibodies also can be constructed using a DNA amplification method, such as PCR, using hybridoma cDNA as a template (Thirion et al, 1996, Eur. J. Cancer Prev. 5, 507-11). Single-chain antibodies can be mono- or bispecific, and can be bivalent or tetravalent. Construction of tetravalent, bispecific single-chain antibodies is taught, for example, in Coloma & Morrison, 1997, Nat. Biotechnol. 15, 159-63. Construction of bivalent, bispecific single-chain antibodies is taught in
Mallender & Voss, 1994, J Biol Chem. 269, 199-206. A nucleotide sequence encoding a single-chain antibody can be constructed using manual or automated nucleotide synthesis, cloned into an expression construct using standard recombinant DNA methods, and introduced into a cell to express the coding sequence, as described below. Alternatively, single-chain antibodies can be produced directly using, for example, filamentous phage technology (Verhaar et al, 1995, Int. J. Cancer 61, 497-501; Nicholls et al, 1993, J Immunol. Meth. 165, 81- 91).
Antibodies which specifically bind to neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides also can be produced by inducing in vivo production in the lymphocyte population or by screening immunoglobulin libraries or panels of highly specific binding reagents as disclosed in the literature (Orlandi et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. 86, 3833-3837, 1989; Winter et al, Nature 349, 293-299, 1991).
Other types of antibodies can be constructed and used therapeutically in methods of the invention. For example, chimeric antibodies can be constructed as disclosed in WO 93/03151. Binding proteins which are derived from immunoglobulins and which are multivalent and multispecific, such as the "diabodies" described in WO 94/13804, also can be prepared.
Antibodies according to the invention can be purified by methods well known in the art. For example, antibodies can be affinity purified by passage over a column to which a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is bound. The bound antibodies can then be eluted from the column using a buffer with a high salt concentration.
Antisense oligonucleotides
Antisense oligonucleotides are nucleotide sequences that are complementary to a specific DNA or RNA sequence. Once introduced into a cell, the complementary nucleotides combine with natural sequences produced by the cell to form complexes and block either transcription or translation. Preferably, an antisense oligonucleotide is at least 11 nucleotides in length, but can be at least 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, or 50 or more nucleotides long. Longer sequences also can be used. Antisense oligonucleotide molecules can be provided in a DNA construct and introduced into a cell as described above to decrease the level of neurotransmitter transporter gene products in the cell.
Antisense oligonucleotides can be deoxyribonucleotides, ribonucleotides, or a combination of both. Oligonucleotides can be synthesized manually or by an automated synthesizer, by covalently linking the 5 ' end of one nucleotide with the 3 ' end of another nucleotide with non-phosphodiester internucleotide linkages such alkylphosphonates, phosphorothioates, phosphorodithioates, alkylphosphonothipates, alkylphosphonates, phosphoramidates, phosphate esters, carbamates, acetamidate, carboxymethyl esters, carbonates, and phosphate triesters. See Brown, Meth. Mol
Biol 20, 1-8, 1994; Sonveaux, Meth. Mol. Biol 26, 1-72, 1994; Uhlmann et al, Chem. Rev. 90, 543-583, 1990.
Modifications of neurotransmitter transporter gene expression can be obtained by designing antisense oligonucleotides that will form duplexes to the control, 5', or regulatory regions of the neurotransmitter transporter gene. Oligonucleotides derived from the transcription initiation site, e.g., between positions -10 and +10 from the start site, are preferred. Similarly, inhibition can be achieved using "triple helix" base-pairing methodology. Triple helix pairing is useful because it causes inhibition of the ability of the double helix to open sufficiently for the binding of polymerases, transcription factors, or chaperons. Therapeutic advances using triplex DNA have been described in the literature (e.g., Gee et al, in Huber & Carr, MOLECULAR AND
IMMUNOLOGIC APPROACHES, Futura Publishing Co, Mt. Kisco, N.Y, 1994). An antisense oligonucleotide also can be designed to block translation of mRNA by preventing the transcript from binding to ribosomes. Precise complementarity is not required for successful complex formation between an antisense oligonucleotide and the complementary sequence of a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide. Antisense oligonucleotides which comprise, for example, 2, 3, 4, or 5 or more stretches of contiguous nucleotides which are precisely complementary to an neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide,. each separated by a stretch of contiguous nucleotides which are not complementary to adjacent neurotransmitter transporter nucleotides, can provide sufficient targeting specificity for neurotransmitter transporter mRNA. Preferably, each stretch of complementary contiguous nucleotides is at least 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 or more nucleotides in length. Non-complementary intervening sequences are preferably 1, 2, 3, or 4 nucleotides in length. One skilled in the art can easily use the calculated melting point of an antisense-sense pair to determine the degree of mismatching which will be tolerated between a particular antisense oligonucleotide and a particular neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide sequence.
Antisense oligonucleotides can be modified without affecting their ability to hybridize to a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide. These modifications can be internal or at one or both ends of the antisense molecule. For example, inter- nucleoside phosphate linkages can be- modified by adding cholesteryl or diamine moieties with varying numbers of carbon residues between the amino groups and terminal ribose. Modified bases and/or sugars, such as arabinose instead of ribose, or a 3', 5 '-substituted oligonucleotide in which the 3' hydroxyl group or the 5' phosphate group are substituted, also can be employed in a modified antisense oligonucleotide. These modified oligonucleotides can be prepared by methods well known in the art. See, e.g., Agrawal et al, Trends Biotechnol 10, 152-158, 1992;
Uhlmann et al, Chem.. Rev. 90, 543-584, 1990; Uhlmann et al, Tetrahedron. Lett. 215, 3539-3542, 1987. Ribozymes
Ribozymes are RNA molecules with catalytic activity. See, e.g., Cech, Science 236, 1532-1539; 1987; Cech, Ann. Rev. Biochem. 59, 543-568; 1'990, Cech, Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol 2, 605-609; 1992, Couture & Stinchcomb, Trends Genet. 12, 510-515,
1996. Ribozymes can be used to inhibit gene function by cleaving an RNA sequence, as is known in the art (e.g., Haseloff et al, U.S. Patent 5,641,673). The mechanism of ribozyme action involves sequence-specific hybridization of the ribozyme molecule to complementary target RNA, followed by endonucleolytic cleavage. Examples include engineered hammerhead motif ribozyme molecules that can specifically and efficiently catalyze endonucleolytic cleavage of specific nucleotide sequences.
The coding sequence of a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be used to generate ribozymes that will specifically bind to mRNA transcribed from the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide. Methods of designing and constructing ribozymes which can cleave other RNA molecules in trans in a highly sequence specific manner have been developed and described in the art (see Haseloff et al. Nature 334, 585-591, 1988). For example, the cleavage activity of ribozymes can be targeted to specific RNAs by engineering a discrete "hybridization" region into the ribozyme. The hybridization region contains a sequence complementary to the target RNA and thus specifically hybridizes with the target (see, for example, Gerlach et al, EP 321,201).
Specific ribozyme cleavage sites within a human neurotransmitter transporter RNA target can be identified by scanning the target molecule for ribozyme cleavage sites which include the following sequences: GUA, GUU, and GUC. Once identified, short RNA sequences of between 15 and 20 ribonucleotides corresponding to the region of the target RNA containing the cleavage site can be evaluated for secondary structural features which may render the target inoperable. Suitability of candidate neurotransmitter transporter RNA targets also can be evaluated by testing accessibility to hybridization with complementary oligonucleotides using ribo- nuclease protection assays. Longer complementary sequences can be used to increase the affinity of the hybridization sequence for the target. The hybridizing and cleavage regions of the ribozyme can be integrally related such that upon hybridizing to the target RNA through the complementary regions, the catalytic region of the ribozyme can cleave the target.
Ribozymes can be introduced into cells as part of a DNA construct. Mechanical methods, such as microinjection, liposome-mediated transfection, electroporation, or calcium phosphate precipitation, can be used to introduce a ribozyme-containing
DNA construct into cells in which it is desired to decrease neurotransmitter transporter expression. Alternatively, if it is desired that the cells stably retain the DNA construct, the construct can be supplied on a plasmid and maintained as a separate element or integrated into the genome of the cells, as is known in the art. A ribozyme-encoding DNA construct can include transcriptional regulatory elements, such as a promoter element, an enhancer or UAS element, and a transcriptional terminator signal, for controlling transcription of ribozymes in the cells.
As taught in Haseloff et al, U.S. Patent 5,641,673, ribozymes can be engineered so that ribozyme expression will occur in response to factors that induce expression of a target gene. Ribozymes also can be engineered to provide an additional level of regulation, so that destruction of mRNA occurs only when both a ribozyme and a target gene are induced in the cells.
Differentially expressed genes
Described herein are methods for the identification of genes whose products interact with human neurotransmitter transporter. Such genes may represent genes that are differentially expressed in disorders including, but not limited to, CNS disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, genitourological disorders, cancer, hematological disorders, cardiovascular disorders, COPD, and asthma. Further, such genes may represent genes that are differentially regulated in response to manipulations relevant to the progression or treatment of such diseases. Additionally, such genes may have a temporally modulated expression, increased or decreased at different stages of tissue or organism development. A differentially expressed gene may also have its expression modulated under control versus experimental conditions. In addition, the human neurotransmitter transporter gene or gene product may itself be tested for differential expression.
The degree to which expression differs in a normal versus a diseased state need only be large enough to be visualized via standard characterization techniques such as differential display techniques. Other such standard characterization techniques by which expression differences may be visualized include but are not limited to, quantitative RT (reverse transcriptase), PCR, and Northern analysis.
To identify differentially expressed genes total RNA or, preferably, mRNA is isolated from tissues of interest. For example, RNA samples are obtained from tissues of experimental subjects and from corresponding tissues of control subjects. Any RNA isolation technique that does not select against the isolation of mRNA may be utilized for the purification of such RNA samples. See, for example, Ausubel et al, ed, CURRENT PROTOCOLS IN MOLECULAR BIOLOGY, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
New York, 1987-1993. Large numbers of tissue samples may readily be processed using techniques well known to those of skill in the art, such as, for example, the single-step RNA isolation process of Chomczynski, U.S. Patent 4,843,155.
Transcripts within the collected RNA samples that represent RNA produced by differentially expressed genes are identified by methods well known to those of skill in the art. They include, for example, differential screening (Tedder et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 85, 208-12, 1988), subtractive hybridization (Hedrick et al, Nature 308, 149-53; Lee et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 88, 2825, 1984), and, preferably, differential display (Liang & Pardee, Science 257, 967-71, 1992; U.S.
Patent 5,262,311). The differential expression information may itself suggest relevant methods for the treatment of disorders involving the human neurotransmitter transporter. For example, treatment may include a modulation of expression of the differentially expressed genes and/or the gene encoding the human neurotransmitter transporter.
The differential expression information may indicate whether the expression or activity of the differentially expressed gene or gene product or the human neurotransmitter transporter gene or gene product are up-regulated or down-regulated.
Screening methods
The invention provides assays for screening test compounds that bind to or modulate the activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide. A test compound preferably binds to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or polynucleotide. More preferably, a test compound decreases or increases functional activity by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100%> relative to the absence of the test compound.
Test compounds
Test compounds can be pharmacologic agents already known in the art or can be compounds previously unknown to have any pharmacological activity. The compoimds can be naturally occurring or designed in the laboratory. They can be isolated from microorganisms, animals, or plants, and can be produced recombinantly, or synthesized by chemical methods known in the art. If desired, test compounds can be obtained using any of the numerous combinatorial library methods known in the art, including but not limited to, biological libraries, spatially addressable parallel solid phase or solution phase libraries, synthetic library methods requiring deconvolution, the "one-bead one-compound" library method, and synthetic library methods using affinity chromatography selection. The biological library approach is limited to polypeptide libraries, while the other four approaches are applicable to polypeptide, non-peptide oligomer, or small molecule libraries of compounds. See Lam, Anticancer Drug Des. 12, 145, 1997.
Methods for the synthesis of molecular libraries are well known in the art (see, for example, DeWitt et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 90, 6909, 1993; Erb et al. Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 91, 11422, 1994; Zuckermann et al, J. Med. Chem. 37, 2678, 1994; Cho et al, Science 261, 1303, 1993; Carell et al, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl. 33, 2059, 1994; Carell et al, Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl 33, 2061; Gallop et al, J. Med. Chem. 37, 1233, 1994). Libraries of compounds can be presented in solution
(see, e.g., Houghten, BioTechniques 13, 412-421, 1992), or on beads (Lam, Nature 354, 82-84, 1991), chips (Fodor, Nature 364, 555-556, 1993), bacteria or spores (Ladner, U.S. Patent 5,223,409), plasmids (Cull et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 89, 1865-1869, 1992), or phage (Scott & Smith, Science 249, 386-390, 1990; Devlin, Science 249, 404-406, 1990); Cwirla et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 97, 6378-6382,
1990; Felici, J Mol Biol 222, 301-310, 1991; and Ladner, U.S. Patent 5,223,409).
High throughput screening
Test compounds can be screened for the ability to bind to neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides or polynucleotides or to affect neurotransmitter transporter activity or neurotransmitter transporter gene expression using high throughput screening. Using high throughput screening, many discrete compounds can be tested in parallel so that large numbers of test compounds can be quickly screened. The most widely established techniques utilize 96-well microtiter plates. The wells of the microtiter plates typically require assay volumes that range from 50 to 500 μl. In addition to the plates, many instruments, materials, pipettors, robotics, plate washers, and plate readers are commercially available to fit the 96-well format.
Alternatively, "free format assays," or assays that have no physical barrier between samples, can be used. For example, an assay using pigment cells (melanocytes) in a simple homogeneous assay for combinatorial peptide libraries is described by Jayawickreme et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 19, 1614-18 (1994). The cells are placed under agarose in petri dishes, and then beads that carry combinatorial compounds are placed on the surface of the agarose. The combinatorial compounds are partially released the compounds from the beads. Active compounds can be visualized as dark pigment areas because, as the compounds diffuse locally into the gel matrix, the active compounds cause the cells to change colors.
Another example of a free format assay is described by Chelsky, "Strategies for Screening Combinatorial Libraries: Novel and Traditional Approaches," reported at the First Annual Conference of The Society for Biomolecular Screening in Philadelphia, Pa. (Nov. 7-10, 1995). Chelsky placed a simple homogenous enzyme assay for carbonic anhydrase inside an agarose gel such that the enzyme in the gel would cause a color change throughout the gel. Thereafter, beads carrying combinatorial compounds via a photo linker were placed inside the gel and the compounds were partially released by UV-light. Compounds that inhibited the enzyme were observed as local zones of inhibition having less color change.
Yet another example is described by Salmon et al, Molecular Diversity 2, 57-63 (1996). In this example, combinatorial libraries were screened for compounds that had cytotoxic effects on cancer cells growing in agar.
Another high throughput screening method is described in Beutel et al, U.S. Patent 5,976,813. In this method, test samples are placed in a porous matrix. One or more assay components are then placed within, on top of, or at the bottom of a matrix such as a gel, a plastic sheet, a filter, or other form of easily manipulated solid support. When samples are introduced to the porous matrix they diffuse sufficiently slowly, such that the assays can be performed without the test samples running together. Binding assays
For binding assays, the test compound is preferably a small molecule that binds to the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, such that normal biological activity is prevented. Examples of such small molecules include, but are not limited to, small peptides or peptide-like molecules.
In binding assays, either the test compound or the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can comprise a detectable label, such as a fluorescent, radioisotopic, chemiluminescent, or enzymatic label, such as horseradish peroxidase, alkaline phosphatase, or luciferase. Detection of a test compound that is bound to the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can then be accomplished, for example, by direct counting of radioemmission, by scintillation counting, or by determining conversion of an appropriate substrate to a detectable product.
Alternatively, binding of a test compound to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be determined without labeling either of the interactants. For example, a microphysiometer can be used to detect binding of a test compound with a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. A microphysiometer (e.g., Cytosensor™) is an analytical instrument that measures the rate at which a cell acidifies its environment using a light-addressable potentiometric sensor (LAPS). Changes in this acidification rate can be used as an indicator of the interaction between a test compound and a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (McConnell et al, Science 257, 1906-1912, 1992).
Determining the ability of a test compound to bind to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide also can be accomplished using a technology such as real-time Bimolecular Interaction Analysis (BIA) (Sjolander & Urbaniczky, Anal Chem. 63, 2338-2345, 1991, and Szabo et al., Curr. Opin. Struct. Biol. 5, 699-705, 1995). BIA is a technology for studying biospecific interactions in real time, without labeling any of the interactants (e.g., BIAcore™). Changes in the optical phenomenon surface plasmon resonance (SPR) can be used as an indication of real-time reactions between biological molecules.
In yet another aspect of the invention, a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be used as a "bait protein" in a two-hybrid assay or three-hybrid assay (see, e.g., U.S. Patent 5,283,317; Zervos et al, Cell 72, 223-232, 1993; Madura et al, J Biol. Chem. 268, 12046-12054, 1993; Bartel et al, BioTechniques 14, 920-924, 1993; Iwabuchi et al, Oncogene 8, 1693-1696, 1993; and Brent W094/10300), to identify other proteins which bind to or interact with the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide and modulate its activity.
The two-hybrid system is based on the modular nature of most transcription factors, which consist of separable DNA-binding and activation domains. Briefly, the assay utilizes two different DNA constructs. For example, in one construct, polynucleotide encoding a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be fused to a polynucleotide encoding the DNA binding domain of a known transcription factor (e.g., GAL-4). In the other construct a DNA sequence that encodes an unidentified protein ("prey" or "sample") can be fused to a polynucleotide that codes for the activation domain of the known transcription factor. If the "bait" and the "prey" proteins are able to interact in vivo to form an protein-dependent complex, the
DNA-binding and activation domains of the transcription factor are brought into close proximity. This proximity allows transcription of a reporter gene (e.g., LacZ), which is operably linked to a transcriptional regulatory site responsive to the transcription factor. Expression of the reporter gene can be detected, and cell colonies containing the functional transcription factor can be isolated and used to obtain the
DNA sequence encoding the protein that interacts with the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
It may be desirable to immobilize either the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or the test compound to facilitate separation of bound from unbound forms of one or both of the interactants, as well as to accommodate 3/059947
44 -
automation of the assay. Thus, either the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or the test compound can be bound to a solid support. Suitable solid supports include, but are. not limited to, glass or plastic slides, tissue culture plates, microtiter wells, tubes, silicon chips, or particles such as beads (including, but not limited to, latex, polystyrene, or glass beads). Any method known in the art can be used to attach the polypeptide (or polynucleotide) of test compound to a solid support, including use of covalent and non-covalent linkages, passive absoφtion, or pairs of binding moieties attached respectively to the polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or test compound and the solid support. Test compounds are preferably bound to the solid support in an array, so that the location of individual test compounds can be tracked. Binding of a test compound to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (or polynucleotide) can be accomplished in any vessel suitable for containing the reactants. Examples of such vessels include microtiter plates, test tubes, and microcentrifuge tubes.
In one embodiment, the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is a fusion protein comprising a domain that allows the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide to be bound to a solid support. For example, glutathione-S-transferase fusion proteins can be adsorbed onto glutathione sepharose beads (Sigma Chemical, St. Louis, Mo.) or glutathione derivatized microtiter plates, which are then combined with the test compound or the test compound and the non-adsorbed neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide; the mixture is then incubated under conditions conducive to complex formation (e.g., at physiological conditions for salt and pH). Following incubation, the beads or microtiter plate wells are washed to remove any unbound components. Binding of the interactants can be determined either directly or indirectly, as described above. Alternatively, the complexes can be dissociated from the solid support before binding is determined.
Other techniques for immobilizing proteins or polynucleotides on a solid support also can be used in the screening assays of the invention. For example, either a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide (or polynucleotide) or a test compound can be immobilized utilizing conjugation of biotin and streptavidin. Biotinylated neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides (or polynucleotides) or test compounds can be prepared from biotin-NHS(N- hydroxysuccinimide) using techniques well known in the art (e.g. , biotinylation kit, Pierce Chemicals, Rockford, 111.) and immobilized in the wells of streptavidin-coated 96 well plates (Pierce Chemical). Alternatively, antibodies which specifically bind to a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, polynucleotide, or a test compound, but which do not interfere with a desired binding site can be derivatized to the wells of the plate. Unbound target or protein can be trapped in the wells by antibody conjugation.
Methods for detecting such complexes, in addition to those described above for the GST-immobilized complexes, include immunodetection of complexes using antibodies which specifically bind to the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or test compound, enzyme-linked assays which rely on detecting an activity of the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, and SDS gel electrophoresis under non- reducing conditions.
Screening for test compounds which bind to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or polynucleotide also can be carried out in an intact cell. Any cell which comprises a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system. A neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above. Binding of the test compound to a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide or polynucleotide is determined as described above.
Functional activity
Test compounds can be tested for the ability to increase or decrease the functional activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. Functional activity can be assessed, for example, by measuring neurotransmitter activity, as is known in the art. Functional assays can be carried out after contacting either a purified neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, a cell membrane preparation, or an intact cell with a test compound. A test compound that decreases functional activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about
50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing neurotransmitter transporter activity. A test compound which increases functional activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for increasing human neurotransmitter transporter activity.
Gene expression
In another embodiment, test compounds that increase or decrease neurotransmitter transporter gene expression are identified. A neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide is contacted with a test compound, and the expression of an RNA or polypeptide product of the neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide is determined. The level of expression of appropriate mRNA or polypeptide in the presence of the test compound is compared to the level of expression of mRNA or polypeptide in the absence of the test compound. The test compound can then be identified as a modulator of expression based on this comparison. For example, when expression of mRNA or polypeptide is greater in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as a stimulator or enhancer of the mRNA or polypeptide expression. Alternatively, when expression of the mRNA or polypeptide is less in the presence of the test compound than in its absence, the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of the mRNA or polypeptide expression.
The level of neurotransmitter transporter mRNA or polypeptide expression in the cells can be determined by methods well known in the art for detecting mRNA or polypeptide. Either qualitative or quantitative methods can be used. The presence of polypeptide products of a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be determined, for example, using a variety of techniques known in the art, including immunochemical methods such as radioimmunoassay, Western blotting, and immunohistochemistry. Alternatively, polypeptide synthesis can be determined in vivo, in a cell culture, or in an in vitro translation system by detecting incorporation of labeled amino acids into a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
Such screening can be carried out either in a cell-free assay system or in an intact cell. Any cell that expresses a human neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be used in a cell-based assay system. The neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide can be naturally occurring in the cell or can be introduced using techniques such as those described above. Either a primary culture or an established cell line, such as CHO or human embryonic kidney 293 cells, can be used.
Pharmaceutical compositions
The invention also provides pharmaceutical compositions that can be administered to a patient to achieve a therapeutic effect. Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can comprise, for example, a human neurotransmitter transporter poly- peptide, neurotransmitter transporter polynucleotide, ribozymes or antisense oligonucleotides, antibodies which specifically bind to a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, or mimetics, activators, or inhibitors of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide activity. The compositions can be administered alone or in combination with at least one other agent, such as stabilizing compound, which can be administered in any sterile, biocompatible pharmaceutical carrier, including, but not limited to, saline, buffered saline, dextrose, and water. The compositions can be administered to a patient alone, or in combination with other agents, drugs or hormones.
In addition to the active ingredients, these pharmaceutical compositions can contain suitable pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers comprising excipients and auxiliaries that facilitate processing of the active compounds into preparations which can be used pharmaceutically. Pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered by any number of routes including, but not limited to, oral, intravenous, intramuscular, intra-arterial, intramedullary, intrathecal, intraventricular, transdermal, subcutaneous, intraperitoneal, intranasal, parenteral, topical, sublingual, or rectal means. Pharmaceutical compositions for oral administration can be formulated using pharmaceutically acceptable carriers well known in the art in dosages suitable for oral administration. Such carriers enable the pharmaceutical compositions to be formulated as tablets, pills, dragees, capsules, liquids, gels, syrups, slurries, suspensions, and the like, for ingestion by the patient.
Pharmaceutical preparations for oral use can be obtained through combination of active compounds with solid excipient, optionally grinding a resulting mixture, and processing the mixture of granules, after adding suitable auxiliaries, if desired, to obtain tablets or dragee cores. Suitable excipients are carbohydrate or protein fillers, such as sugars, including lactose, sucrose, mannitol, or sorbitol; starch from corn, wheat, rice, potato, or other plants; cellulose, such as methyl cellulose, hydroxypropylmethyl-cellulose, or sodium carboxymethylcellulose; gums including arabic and tragacanth; and proteins such as gelatin and collagen. If desired, disintegrating or solubilizing agents can be added, such as the cross-linked polyvinyl pyrrolidone, agar, alginic acid, or a salt thereof, such as sodium alginate.
Dragee cores can be used in conjunction with suitable coatings, such as concentrated sugar solutions, which also can contain gum arabic, talc, polyvinylpyrrolidone, carbopol gel, polyethylene glycol, and or titanium dioxide, lacquer solutions, and suitable organic solvents or solvent mixtures. Dyestuffs or pigments can be added to the tablets or dragee coatings for product identification or to characterize the quantity of active compound, i.e., dosage.
Pharmaceutical preparations that can be used orally include push-fit capsules made of gelatin, as well as soft, sealed capsules made of gelatin and a coating, such as glycerol or sorbitol. Push-fit capsules can contain active ingredients mixed with a filler or binders, such as lactose or starches, lubricants, such as talc or magnesium stearate, and, optionally, stabilizers. In soft capsules, the active compounds can be dissolved or suspended in suitable liquids, such as fatty oils, liquid, or liquid polyethylene glycol with or without stabilizers.
Pharmaceutical formulations suitable for parenteral administration can be formulated in aqueous solutions, preferably in physiologically compatible buffers such as Hanks' solution, Ringer's solution, or physiologically buffered saline. Aqueous injection suspensions can contain substances that increase the viscosity of the suspension, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, sorbitol, or dextran. Additionally, suspensions of the active compounds can be prepared as appropriate oily injection suspensions. Suitable lipophilic solvents or vehicles include fatty oils such as sesame oil, or synthetic fatty acid esters, such as ethyl oleate or triglycerides, or liposomes. Non-lipid polycationic amino polymers also can be used for delivery.
Optionally, the suspension also can contain suitable stabilizers or agents that increase the solubility of the compounds to allow for the preparation of highly concentrated solutions. For topical or nasal administration, penetrants appropriate to the particular barrier to be permeated are used in the formulation. Such penetrants are generally known in the art.
The pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention can be manufactured in a manner that is known in the art, e.g., by means of conventional mixing, dissolving, granulating, dragee-making, levigating, emulsifying, encapsulating, entrapping, or lyophilizing processes. The pharmaceutical composition can be provided as a salt and can be formed with many acids, including but not limited to, hydrochloric, , sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free base forms. In other cases, the preferred preparation can be a lyophilized powder which can contain any or all of the following: 1-50 mM histidine, 0.1%-2% sucrose, and 2-7% mannitol, at a pH range of 4.5 to 5.5, that is combined with buffer prior to use. Further details on techniques for formulation and administration can be found in the latest edition of REMINGTON'S PHARMACEUTICAL SCIENCES (Maack Publishing Co, Easton, Pa.). After pharmaceutical compositions have been prepared, they can be placed in an appropriate container and labeled for treatment of an indicated condition. Such labeling would include amount, frequency, and method of administration.
Therapeutic indications and methods
Human neurotransmitter transporter can be regulated to treat CNS disorders, gastrointestinal disorders, genitourological disorders, cancer, hematological disorders, cardiovascular disorders, COPD, and asthma.
Central Nervous System (CNS) disorders
The novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following brain tissues: substantia nigra, temporal lobe, cerebral cortex, parietal lobe, cerebral peduncles, hippocampus, vermis cerebelli, precentral gyrus, occipital lobe, Alzheimer cerebral cortex, Alzheimer brain frontal lobe, tonsilla cerebelli, brain, frontal lobe, cerebellum (left), cerebellum (right), pons, thalamus, Alzheimer brain, corpus callosum, dorsal root ganglia, retina. The expression in brain tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue Alzheimer cerebral cortex and healthy tissue cerebral cortex, between diseased tissue Alzheimer brain frontal lobe and healthy tissue frontal lobe, between diseased tissue Alzheimer brain and healthy tissue brain demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to. diagnose nervous system diseases. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat nervous system diseases. Central and peripheral nervous system disorders also can be treated, such as primary ft and secondary disorders after brain injury, disorders of mood, anxiety disorders, disorders of thought and volition, disorders of sleep and wakefulness, diseases of the motor unit, such as neurogenic and myopathic disorders, neurodegenerative disorders such as Alzheimer's and Parkinson's disease, and processes of peripheral and chronic pain.
Pain that is associated with CNS disorders also can be treated by regulating the activity of human neurotransmitter transporter. Pain which can be treated includes that associated with central nervous system disorders, such as multiple sclerosis, spinal cord injury, sciatica, failed back surgery syndrome, traumatic brain injury, epilepsy, Parkinson's disease, post-stroke, and vascular lesions in the brain and spinal cord (e.g., infarct, hemorrhage, vascular malformation). Non-central neuropathic pain includes that associated with post mastectomy pain, reflex sympathetic dystrophy (RSD), trigeminal neuralgiaradioculopathy, post-surgical pain, HIV/AIDS related pain, cancer pain, metabolic neuropathies (e.g., diabetic neuropathy, vasculitic neuropathy secondary to connective tissue disease), paraneoplastic polyneuropathy associated, for example, with carcinoma of lung, or leukemia, or lymphoma, or carcinoma of prostate, colon or stomach, trigeminal neuralgia, cranial neuralgias, and post-herpetic neuralgia. Pain associated with cancer and cancer treatment also can be treated, as can headache pain (for example, migraine with aura, migraine without aura, and other migraine disorders), episodic and chronic tension-type headache, tension-type like headache, cluster headache, and chronic paroxysmal hemicrania.
Gastrointestinal disorders
The novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following tissues of the gastrointestinal system: rectum, stomach tumor, ileum, esophagus, ileum tumor, colon tumor, esophagus tumor, stomach, and colon. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue ileum tumor and healthy tissue ileum demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose gastrointestinal disorders. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat gastrointestinal disorders.
Gastrointestinal disorders comprise primary or secondary, acute or chronic diseases of the organs of the gastrointestinal tract which may be acquired or inherited, benign or malignant or metaplastic, and which may affect the organs of the gastrointestinal tract or the body as a whole. They include but are not limited to disorders of the esophagus, such as achalasia, vigoruos achalasia, dysphagia, cricopharyngeal incoordination, pre-esophageal dysphagia, diffuse esophageal spasm, globus sensation, Barrett's metaplasia, and gastroesophageal reflux. They also include disorders of the stomach and duodenum, such as functional dyspepsia, inflammation of the gastric mucosa, gastritis, stress gastritis, chronic erosive gastritis, atrophy of gastric glands, metaplasia of gastric tissues, gastric ulcers, duodenal ulcers, and neoplasms of the stomach. Gastrointestinal disorders also include disorders of the pancreas, such as acute or chronic pancreatitis, insufficiency of the exocrinic or endocrinic tissues of the pancreas like steatorrhea, diabetes, neoplasms of the exocrine or endocrine pancreas (e.g., multiple endocrine neoplasia syndrome, ductal adenocarcinoma, cystadenocarcinoma, islet cell tumors, insulinoma, gastrinoma, carcinoid tumors, and glucagonoma), Zollinger-Ellison syndrome, Vipoma syndrome, and malabsorption . syndrome. Gastrointestinal disorders also include disorders of the bowel, such as chronic inflammatory diseases of the bowel, Crohn's disease, ileus, diarrhea and constipation, colonic inertia, megacolon, malabsorption syndrome, and ulcerative colitis, functional bowel disorders, such as irritable bowel syndrome, neoplasms of the bowel, such as familial polyposis, adenocarcinoma, primary malignant lymphoma, carcinoid tumors, Kaposi's sarcoma, polyps, and cancer of the colon and rectum. Genitourinary disorders
The novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following tissues of the genitourinary system: ovary tumor, prostate BPH, penis, ureter, corpus cavernosum, ovary, and prostate. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue prostate BPH and healthy tissue prostate demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose genitourinary disorders. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat genitourinary disorders.
Genitourological disorders comprise benign and malign disorders of the organs constituting the genitourological system of female and male, renal diseases such as acute or chronic renal failure, immunologically mediated renal diseases such as renal transplant rejection, lupus nephritis, immune complex renal diseases, glomerulo- pathies, nephritis, toxic nephropathy, obstructive uropathies such as benign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH), neurogenic bladder syndrome, urinary incontinence such as urge-, stress-, or overflow incontinence, pelvic pain, and erectile dysfunction.
Urinary Incontinence. Urinary incontinence (UI) is the involuntary loss of urine.
Urge urinary incontinence (UUI) is one of the most common types of UI together with stress urinary incontinence (SUE), which is usually caused by a defect in the urethral closure mechanism. UUI is often associated with neurological disorders or diseases causing neuronal damage, such as dementia, Parkinson's disease, multiple sclerosis, stroke, and diabetes, although it also occurs in individuals with no such disorders. One of the usual causes of UUI is overactive bladder (OAB), which is a medical condition referring to the symptoms of frequency and urgency derived from abnormal contractions and instability of the detrusor muscle.
There are several medications for urinary incontinence on the market today, mainly to help treating UUI. Therapy for OAB is focused on drugs that affect peripheral neural control mechanisms or those that act directly on bladder detrusor smooth muscle contraction, with a major emphasis on development of anticholinergic agents. These agents can inhibit the parasympathetic nerves, which control bladder voiding, or can exert a direct spasmolytic effect on the detrusor muscle of the bladder. This results in a decrease in intravesicular pressure, an increase in capacity, and a reduction in the frequency of bladder contraction. Orally active anticholinergic drugs, such as propantheline (ProBanthine), tolterodine tartrate (Detrol), and oxybutynin (Ditropan), are the most commonly prescribed drugs. However, their most serious drawbacks are unacceptable side effects, such as dry mouth, abnormal visions, constipation, and central nervous system disturbances. These side effects lead to poor compliance. Dry mouth symptoms alone are responsible for a 70% non- compliance rate with oxybutynin. The inadequacies of present therapies highlight the need for novel, efficacious, safe, orally available drugs that have fewer side effects.
Cancer
The novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following cancer tissues: ovary tumor, lung tumor, thyroid tumor, stomach tumor, ileum tumor, colon tumor, esophagus tumor. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue lung tumor and healthy tissue lung, between diseased tissue thyroid tumor and healthy tissue thyroid, between diseased tissue stomach tumor and healthy tissue stomach, between diseased tissue colon tumor and healthy tissue colon, between diseased tissue esophagus tumor and healthy tissue esophagus demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose cancer. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat .cancer.
Cancer disorders within the scope of the invention comprise any disease of an organ or tissue in mammals characterized by poorly controlled or uncontrolled multipli- cation of normal or abnormal cells in that tissue and its effect on the body as a whole. Cancer diseases within the scope of the invention comprise benign neoplasms, dysplasias, hyperplasias as well as neoplasms showing metastatic growth or any other transformations, e.g., leukoplakias, which often precede a breakout of cancer. Cells and tissues are cancerous when they grow more rapidly than normal cells, displacing or spreading into the surrounding healthy tissue or any other tissues of the body described as metastatic growth, assume abnormal shapes and sizes, show changes in their nucleocytoplasmatic ratio, nuclear polychromasia, and finally may cease.
Cancerous cells and tissues may affect the body as a whole when causing paraneoplastic syndromes or if cancer occurs within a vital organ or tissue, normal function will be impaired or halted, with possible fatal results. The ultimate involvement of a vital organ by cancer, either primary or metastatic, may lead to the death of the mammal affected. Cancer tends to spread, and the extent of its spread is usually related to an individual's chances of surviving the disease. Cancers are generally said to be in one of three stages of growth: early, or localized, when a tumor is still confined to the tissue of origin, or primary site; direct extension, where cancer cells from the tumor have invaded adjacent tissue or have spread only to regional lymph nodes; or metastasis, in which cancer cells have migrated to distant parts of the body from the primary site, via the blood or lymph systems, and have established secondary sites of infection. Cancer is said to be malignant because of its tendency to cause death if not treated.
Benign tumors usually do not cause death, although they may if they interfere with a normal body function by virtue of their location, size, or paraneoplastic side effects. Hence, benign tumors fall under the definition of cancer within the scope of the invention as well. In general, cancer cells divide at a higher rate than do normal cells, but the distinction between the growth of cancerous and normal tissues is not so much the rapidity of cell division in the former as it is the partial or complete loss of growth restraint in cancer cells and their failure to differentiate into a useful, limited tissue of the type that characterizes the functional equilibrium of growth of normal tissue.
Cancer tissues may express certain molecular receptors and probably are influenced by the host's susceptibility and immunity and it is known that certain cancers of the breast and prostate, for example, are considered dependent on specific hormones for their existence. The term "cancer" under the scope of the invention is not limited to simple benign neoplasia but includes any other benign and malign neoplasia, such as 1) carcinoma, 2) sarcoma, 3) carcinosarcoma, 4) cancers of the blood-forming tissues, 5) tumors of nerve tissues including the brain, and 6) cancer of skin cells.
Carcinoma occurs in epithelial tissues, which cover the outer body (the skin) and line mucous membranes and the inner cavitary structures of organs e.g. such as the breast, lung, the respiratory and gastrointestinal tracts, the endocrine glands, and the genitourinary system. Ductal or glandular elements may persist in epithelial tumors, as in adenocarcinomas, e.g., thyroid adenocarcinoma, gastric adenocarcinoma, and uterine adenocarcinoma. Cancers of the pavement-cell epithelium of the skin and of certain mucous membranes, such as cancers of the tongue, lip, larynx, urinary bladder, uterine cervix, or . penis, may be termed epidermoid or squamous-cell carcinomas of the respective tissues and are within the scope of the definition of cancer as well.
Sarcomas develop in connective tissues, including fibrous tissues, adipose (fat) tissues, muscle, blood vessels, bone, and cartilage such as osteogenic sarcoma, liposarcoma, fibrosarcoma, and synovial sarcoma.
Carcinosarcoma is cancer that develops in both epithelial and connective tissue. Cancer disease within the scope of this definition may be primary or secondary, whereby primary indicates that the cancer originated in the tissue where it is found rather than was established as a secondary site through metastasis from another lesion. Cancers and tumor diseases within the scope of this definition may be benign or malign and may affect all anatomical structures of the body of a mammal. By example, to they comprise cancers and tumor diseases of I) the bone marrow and bone marrow derived cells (leukemias), II) the endocrine and exocrine glands, such as the thyroid, parathyroid, pituitary, adrenal glands, salivary glands, and pancreas III) the breast, such as benign or malignant tumors, in the mammary glands of either a male or a female, the mammary ducts, adenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, comedocarcinoma, Paget's disease of the nipple, inflammatory carcinoma of the young woman, IN) the lung, N) the stomach, VI) the liver and spleen, VII) the small intestine, VIII) the colon, IX) the bone and its supportive and connective tissues such as malignant or benign bone tumor, such as malignant osteogenic sarcoma, benign osteoma, cartilage tumors, malignant chondrosarcoma or benign chondroma,; bone marrow tumors such as malignant myeloma or benign eosinophilic granuloma, as well as metastatic tumors from bone tissues at other locations of the body; X) the mouth, throat, larynx, and the esophagus, XI) the urinary bladder and the internal and external organs and structures of the urogenital system of male and female such. as the ovaries, uterus, cervix of the uterus, testes, and prostate gland, XII) the prostate, XIII) the pancreas, such as ductal carcinoma of the pancreas; X V) the lymphatic tissue such as lymphomas and other tumors of lymphoid origin, XV) the skin, XVI) cancers and tumor diseases of all anatomical structures belonging to the respiratory systems including thoracal muscles and linings, XVII) primary or secondary cancer of the lymph nodes, XVIII) the tongue and of the bony structures of the hard palate or sinuses, XVIV) the mouth, cheeks, neck and salivary glands, XX) the blood vessels including the heart and their linings, XXI) the smooth or skeletal muscles and their ligaments and linings, XXII) the peripheral, the autonomous, the central nervous system including the cerebellum, and XXIII) the adipose tissue.
Hematological disorders
The novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following tissues of the hematological system: bone marrow CD33+ cells, erythrocytes, lymph node, bone marrow CD15+ cells, bone marrow CD71+ cells, cord blood CD71+ cells. The expression in the above-mentioned tissues demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose hematological diseases. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat hematological disorders.
Anemia
Hemoglobin in red blood cells is the key component for transporting oxygen from the lungs to the tissues. In anemia the level of hemoglobin has fallen below 12g/L. Therefore the oxygen carrying capacity of blood is reduced. Common reasons for anemia include acute or chronic blood loss, insufficient levels of erythropoietin synthesis in the kidneys (e.g. in dialysis patients) or insufficient output of red blood cells from bone marrow after chemotherapy or HIV infection etc.. Current therapy of anemia is aimed at increasing the hematocrit either by transfusion or by stimulating erythropoiesis with agents such as erythropoietin. The treatment goal is to restore hemoglobin levels above 12g/L.
Neutropenia
Neutrophils play a key role in the defense against infections. Neutropenia is an abnormally low white blood cell count which causes an increased incidence of infections. Causes of neutropenia include: drug-induced (e.g., following cancer chemotherapy), increased destruction of neutrophils (e.g., immune-mediated) or decreased bone marrow function (e.g., familial neutropenia). Neutropenia following cancer chemotherapy is currently treated with growth factors such as G-CSF or GM-
CSF that stimulate granulopoiesis. The treatment goal is to raise the neutrophil count in order to reduce the susceptibility to infection. 03/059947
- 59
Thrombocytopenia
Thrombocytopenia is a disorder where the number of platelets is inappropriately low. Since platelets play an essential role in thrombus formation to limit blood loss following vessel injury, insufficient platelet levels may lead to abnormal bleeding. There are many causes of thrombocytopenia including drug-induced thrombocytopenia (e.g., following cancer chemotherapy) and immune thrombocytopenia (due to increased degradation of platelets). Platelet transfusions or IL-11 can be used to restore platelet levels in order to reduce the bleeding risk.
Aplastic anemia (Pancyteponia)
Aplastic anemia is a life-threatening hematologic disorder characterized by absent or markedly diminished hematopoietic precursors in the bone marrow and resulting in neutropenia, anemia and thrombocytopenia. A large number of agents can cause aplastic anemia (drugs, chemicals and toxins) radiation and certain infections can also induce aplastic anemia. More frequently, aplastic anemia occurs as an unpredictable idiosyncratic reaction to drugs such as anti-inflammatory agents, antibiotics, and antiepileptic drugs. Aplastic anemia typically develops weeks or month during drug administration or delayed after drug administration has been discontinued. Several congenital and familiar forms of aplastic anemia have been described, including Fanconi's anemia, Shwachman-Diamond syndrome, familiar aplastic anemia, and aplasia associated with dyskeratosis congenita or amega- karyocytic thrompocytopenia.
Cardiovascular disorders
The novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following cardiovascular related tissues: interventricular septum, coronary artery, coronary artery sclerotic, heart atrium (right), HUVEC cells, aorta sclerotic, aorta, artery, heart atrium (left), vein, coronary artery smooth muscle primary cells. Expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue coronary artery sclerotic and healthy tissue coronary artery, between diseased tissue aorta sclerotic and healthy tissue aorta demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose cardiovascular diseases. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat cardiovascular diseases.
Cardiovascular diseases include the following disorders of the heart and the vascular system: congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, ischemic diseases of the heart, all kinds of atrial and ventricular arrhythmias, hypertensive vascular diseases, and peripheral vascular diseases.
Heart failure is defined as a pathophysiologic state in which an abnormality of cardiac function is responsible for the failure of the heart to pump blood at a rate commensurate with the requirement of the metabolizing tissue. It includes all forms of pumping failure, such as high-output and low-output, acute and chronic, right- sided or left-sided, systolic or diastolic, independent of the underlying cause.
Myocardial infarction (MI) is generally caused by an abrupt decrease in coronary blood flow that follows a thrombotic occlusion of a coronary artery previously narrowed by arteriosclerosis. MI prophylaxis (primary and secondary prevention) is included, as well as the acute treatment of MI and the prevention of complications.
Ischemic diseases are conditions in which the coronary flow is restricted resulting in a perfusion which inadequate to meet the myocardial requirement for oxygen. This group of diseases includes stable angina, unstable angina, and asymptomatic ischemia.
Arrhythmias include all forms of atrial and ventricular tachyarrhythmias (atrial tachycardia, atrial flutter, atrial fibrillation, atrio-ventricular reentrant tachycardia, preexcitation syndrome, ventricular tachycardia, ventricular flutter, and ventricular fibrillation), as well as bradycardic forms of arrhythmias.
Vascular diseases include primary as well as all kinds of secondary arterial hypertension (renal, endocrine, neurogenic, others). The disclosed gene and its product may be used as drug targets for the treatment of hypertension as well as for the prevention of all complications. Peripheral vascular diseases are defined as vascular diseases in which arterial and/or venous flow is reduced resulting in an imbalance between blood supply and tissue oxygen demand. It includes chronic peripheral arterial occlusive disease (PAOD), acute arterial thrombosis and embolism, inflammatory vascular disorders, Raynaud's phenomenon, and venous disorders.
COPD and Asthma
The novel human neurotransmitter transporter is highly expressed in the following tissues of the respiratory system: lung COPD, lung tumor, lung right lower lobe, lung right upper lobe, lung right mid lobe, lung. The expression in the above mentioned tissues and in particular the differential expression between diseased tissue lung COPD and healthy tissue lung demonstrates that the novel human neurotransmitter transporter or mRNA can be used to diagnose COPD and/or Asthma. Additionally, the activity of the novel human neurotransmitter transporter can be modulated to treat those diseases.
Allergy is a complex process in which environmental antigens induce clinically adverse reactions. The inducing antigens, called allergens, typically elicit a specific IgE response and, although in most cases the allergens themselves have little or no intrinsic toxicity, they induce pathology when the IgE response in turn elicits an IgE- dependent or T cell-dependent hypersensitivity reaction. Hypersensitivity reactions can be local or systemic and typically occur within minutes of allergen exposure in individuals who have previously been sensitized to an allergen. The hypersensitivity reaction of allergy develops when the allergen is recognized by IgE antibodies bound to specific receptors on the surface of effector cells, such as mast cells, basophils, or eosinophils, which causes the activation of the effector cells and the release of mediators that produce the acute signs and symptoms of the reactions. Allergic diseases include asthma, allergic rhinitis (hay fever), atopic dermatitis, and anaphylaxis.
Asthma is though to arise as a result of interactions between multiple genetic and environmental factors and is characterized by three major features: 1) intermittent and reversible airway obstruction caused by bronchoconstriction, increased mucus production, and thickening of the walls of the airways that leads to a narrowing of the airways, 2) airway hyperresponsiveness caused by a decreased control of airway caliber, and 3) airway inflammation. Certain cells are critical to the inflammatory reaction of asthma and they include T cells and antigen presenting cells, B cells that produce IgE, and mast cells, basophils, eosinophils, and other cells that bind IgE.
These effector cells accumulate at the site of allergic reaction in the airways and release toxic products that contribute to the acute pathology and eventually to the tissue destruction related to the disorder. Other resident cells, such as smooth muscle cells, lung epithelial cells, mucus-producing cells, and nerve cells may also be abnormal in individuals with asthma and may contribute to the pathology. While the airway obstruction of asthma, presenting clinically as an intermittent wheeze and shortness of breath, is generally the most pressing symptom of the disease requiring immediate treatment, the inflammation and tissue destruction associated with the disease can lead to irreversible changes that eventually make asthma a chronic disabling disorder requiring long-term management.
Despite recent important advances in our understanding of the pathophysiology of asthma, the disease appears to be increasing in prevalence and severity (Gergen and Weiss, Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 146, 823-24, 1992). It is estimated that 30-40% of the population suffer with atopic allergy, and 15% of phildren and 5% of adults in the population suffer from asthma (Gergen and Weiss, 1992). Thus, an enormous burden is placed on our health care resources. However, both diagnosis and treatment of asthma are difficult. The severity of lung tissue inflammation is not easy to measure and the symptoms of the disease are often indistinguishable from those of respiratory infections, chronic respiratory inflammatory disorders, allergic rhinitis* or other respiratory disorders. Often, the inciting allergen cannot be determined, making removal of the causative environmental agent difficult.
Current pharmacological treatments suffer their own set of disadvantages. Commonly used therapeutic agents, such as beta agonists, can act as symptom relievers to transiently improve pulmonary function, but do not affect the underlying inflammation. Agents that can reduce the underlying inflammation, such as anti-inflammatory steroids, can have major drawbacks that range from immunosuppression to bone loss (Goodman and Gilman's THE PHARMACOLOGIC BASIS OF THERAPEUTICS, Seventh Edition, MacMillan Publishing Company, NY, USA, 1985). In addition, many of the present therapies, such as inhaled corticosteroids, are short-lasting, inconvenient to use, and must be used often on a regular basis, in some cases for life, making failure of patients to comply with the treatment a major problem and thereby reducing their effectiveness as a treatment.
Because of the problems associated with conventional therapies, alternative treatment strategies have been evaluated. Glycophorin A (Chu and Sharom, Cell. Immunol. 145, 223-39, 1992), cyclosporin (Alexander et al, Lancet 339, 324-28, 1992), and a nonapeptide fragment of IL-2 (Zav'yalov et al, Immunol Lett. 31, 285-88, 1992) all inhibit interleukin-2 dependent T lymphocyte proliferation; however, they are known to have many other effects. For example, cyclosporin is used as a immuno- suppressant after organ transplantation. While these agents may represent alternatives to steroids in the treatment of asthmatics, they inhibit interleukin-2 dependent T lymphocyte proliferation and potentially critical immune functions associated with homeostasis. Other treatments that block the release or activity of mediators of broncho- chonstriction, such as cromones or anti-leukotrienes, have recently been introduced for the treatment of mild asthma, but they are expensive and not effective in all patients and it is unclear whether they have any effect on the chronic changes associated with asthmatic inflammation. What is needed in the art is the identification of a treatment that can act in pathways critical to the development of asthma that both blocks the episodic attacks of the disorder and preferentially dampens the hyperactive allergic immune response without immunocompromising the patient.
Chronic obstructive pulmonary (or airways) disease (COPD) is a condition defined physiologically as airflow obstruction that generally results from a mixture of emphysema and peripheral airway obstruction due to chronic bronchitis (Senior & Shapiro, Pulmonary Diseases and Disorders, 3d ed. New York, McGraw-Hill, 1998, pp. 659-681, 1998; Barnes, Chest 117, 10S-14S, 2000). Emphysema is characterized by destruction of alveolar walls leading to abnormal enlargement of the air spaces of the lung. Chronic bronchitis is defined clinically as the presence of chronic productive cough for three months in each of two successive years. In COPD, airflow obstruction is usually progressive and is only partially reversible. By far the most important risk factor for development of COPD is cigarette smoking, although the disease does occur in non-smokers.
Chronic inflammation of the airways is a key pathological feature of COPD (Senior & Shapiro, 1998). The inflammatory cell population comprises increased numbers of macrophages, neutrophils, and CD8. lymphocytes. Inhaled irritants, such as cigarette smoke, activate macrophages which are resident in the respiratory tract, as well as epithelial cells leading to release of chemokines (e.g., interleukin-8) and other chemotactic factors. These chemotactic factors act to increase the neutrophil/- monocyte trafficking from the blood into the lung tissue and airways. Neutrophils and monocytes recruited into the airways can release a variety of potentially damaging mediators such as proteolytic enzymes and reactive oxygen species. Matrix degradation and emphysema, along with airway wall thickening, surfactant dysfunction, and mucus hypersecretion, all are potential sequelae of this inflammatory response that lead to impaired airflow and gas exchange.
This invention further pertains to the use of novel agents identified by the screening assays described above. Accordingly, it is within the scope of this invention to use a test compound identified as described herein in an appropriate animal model. For example, an agent identified as described herein (e.g., a modulating agent, an antisense nucleic acid molecule, a specific antibody, ribozyme, or a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide binding molecule) can be used in an animal model to determine the efficacy, toxicity, or side effects of treatment with such an agent. Alternatively, an agent identified as described herein can be used in an animal model to determine the mechanism of action of such an agent. Furthermore, this invention pertains to uses of novel agents identified by the above-described screening assays for treatments as described herein.
A reagent which affects neurotransmitter transporter activity can be administered to a human cell, either in vitro or in vivo, to reduce neurotransmitter transporter activity. The reagent preferably binds to an expression product of a human neurotransmitter transporter gene. If the expression product is a protein, the reagent is preferably an antibody. For treatment of human cells ex vivo, an antibody can be added to a preparation of stem cells that have been removed from the body. The cells can then be replaced in the same or another human body, with or without clonal propagation, as is known in the art.
In one embodiment, the reagent is delivered using a liposome. Preferably, the liposome is stable in the animal into which it has been administered for at least about 30 minutes, more preferably for at least about 1 hour, and even more preferably for at least about 24 hours. A liposome comprises a lipid composition that is capable of targeting a reagent, particularly a polynucleotide, to a particular site in an animal, such as a human. Preferably, the lipid composition of the liposome is capable of targeting to a specific organ of an animal, such as the lung, liver, spleen, heart brain, lymph nodes, and skin.
A liposome useful in the present invention comprises a lipid composition that is capable of fusing with the plasma membrane of the targeted cell to deliver its contents to the cell. Preferably, the ttansfection efficiency of a liposome is about 0.5 μg of DNA per 16 nmole of liposome delivered to about 10 cells, more preferably about 1.0 μg of DNA per 16 nmole of liposome delivered to about 106 cells, and even more preferably about 2.0 μg of DNA per .16 nmol of liposome delivered to about 106 cells. Preferably, a liposome is between about 100 and
500 nm, more preferably between about 150 and 450 nm, and even more preferably between about 200 and 400 nm in diameter.
Suitable liposomes for use in the present invention include those liposomes standardly used in, for example, gene delivery methods known to those of skill in the art. More prefened liposomes include liposomes having a polycationic lipid composition and/or liposomes having a cholesterol backbone conjugated to polyethylene glycol. Optionally, a liposome comprises a compound capable of targeting the liposome to a particular cell type, such as a cell-specific ligand exposed on the outer surface of the liposome.
Complexing a liposome with a reagent such as an antisense oligonucleotide or ribozyme can be achieved using methods that are standard in the art (see, for example, U.S. Patent 5,705,151). Preferably, from about 0.1 μg to about 10 μg of polynucleotide is combined with about 8 nmol of liposomes, more preferably from about 0.5 μg to about 5 μg of polynucleotides are combined with about 8 nmol liposomes, and even more preferably about 1.0 μg of polynucleotides is combined with about 8 nmol liposomes.
In another embodiment, antibodies can be delivered to specific tissues in vivo using receptor-mediated targeted delivery. Receptor-mediated DNA delivery techniques are taught in, for example, Findeis et al. Trends in Biotechnol. 11, 202-05 (1993); Chiou et al, GENE THERAPEUTICS: METHODS AND APPLICATIONS OF DIRECT GENE TRANSFER (J.A. Wolff, ed.) (1994); Wu & Wu, J. Biol Chem. 263, 621-24 (1988); Wu et al, J. Biol Chem. 269, 542-46 (1994); Zenke et al, Proc. Natl Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 87, 3655-59 (1990); Wu et al, J. Biol Chem. 266, 338-42 (1991).
Determination of a therapeutically effective dose
The determination of a therapeutically effective dose is well within the capability of those skilled in the art. A therapeutically effective dose refers to that amount of active ingredient which increases or decreases functional activity relative to the' functional activity which occurs in the absence of the therapeutically effective dose.
For any compound, the therapeutically effective dose can be estimated initially either in cell culture assays or in animal models, usually mice, rabbits, dogs, or pigs. The animal model also can be used to determine the appropriate concentration range and route of administration. Such information can then be used to determine useful doses and routes for administration in humans.
Therapeutic efficacy and toxicity, e.g., ED50 (the dose therapeutically effective in
50% of the population) and LD50 (the dose lethal to 50%o of the population), can be determined by standard pharmaceutical procedures in cell cultures or experimental animals. The dose ratio of toxic to therapeutic effects is the therapeutic index, and it can be expressed as the ratio, LD5o/ED50.
Pharmaceutical compositions that exhibit large therapeutic indices are prefened. The data obtained from cell culture assays and animal studies is used in formulating a range of dosage for human use. The dosage contained in such compositions is preferably within a range of circulating concentrations that include the ED50 with little or no toxicity. The dosage varies within this range depending upon the dosage form employed, sensitivity of the patient, and the route of administration. The exact dosage will be determined by the practitioner, in light of factors related to the subject that requires treatment. Dosage and administration are adjusted to provide sufficient levels of the active ingredient or to maintain the desired effect. Factors that can be taken into account include the severity of the disease state, general health of the subject, age, weight, and gender of the subject, diet, time and frequency of administration, drug combination(s), reaction sensitivities, and tolerance/response to therapy. Long-acting pharmaceutical compositions can be administered every 3 to 4 days, every week, or once every two weeks depending on the half-life and clearance rate of the particular formulation.
Normal dosage amounts can vary from 0.1 to 100,000 micrograms, up to a total dose of about 1 g, depending upon the route of administration. Guidance as to particular dosages and methods of delivery is provided in the literature and generally available to practitioners in the art. Those skilled in the art will employ different formulations for nucleotides than for proteins or their inhibitors. Similarly, delivery of polynucleotides or polypeptides will be specific to particular cells, conditions, locations, etc.
If the reagent is a single-chain antibody, polynucleotides encoding the antibody can be constructed and introduced into a cell either ex vivo or in vivo using well- established techniques including, but not limited to, transferrin-polycation-mediated DNA transfer, transfection with naked or encapsulated nucleic acids, liposome- mediated cellular fusion, intracellular transportation of DNA-coated latex beads, protoplast fusion, viral infection, electroporation, "gene gun," and DEAE- or calcium phosphate-mediated transfection.
Effective in vivo dosages of an antibody are in the range of about 5 μg to about
50 μg/kg, about 50 μg to about 5 mg/kg, about 100 μg to about 500 μg/kg of patient body weight, and about 200 to about 250 μg/kg of patient body weight. For administration of polynucleotides encoding single-chain antibodies, effective in vivo dosages are in the range of about 100 ng to about 200 ng, 500 ng to about 50 mg, about 1 μg to about 2 mg, about 5 μg to about 500 μg, and about 20 μg to about 100 μg of DNA.
If the expression product is mRNA, the reagent is preferably an antisense oligonucleotide or a ribozyme. Polynucleotides that express antisense oligonucleotides or ribozymes can be introduced into cells by a variety of methods, as described above.
Preferably, a reagent reduces expression of a human neurotransmitter transporter gene or the activity of a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide by at least about 10, preferably about 50, more preferably about 75, 90, or 100% relative to the absence of the reagent. The effectiveness of the mechanism chosen to decrease the level of expression of a human neurotransmitter transporter gene or the activity of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide can be assessed using methods well known in the art, such as hybridization of nucleotide probes to neurotransmitter transporter- specific mRNA, quantitative RT-PCR, immunologic detection of a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, or measurement of functional activity.
In any of the embodiments described above, any of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention can be administered in combination with other appropriate therapeutic agents. Selection of the appropriate agents for use in combination therapy can be made by one of ordinary skill in the art, according to conventional pharmaceutical principles. The combination of therapeutic agents can act synergistically to effect the treatment or prevention of the various disorders described above. Using this approach, one may be able to achieve therapeutic efficacy with lower dosages of each agent, thus reducing the potential for adverse side effects.
Any of the therapeutic methods described above can be applied to any subject in need of such therapy, including, for example, mammals such as dogs, cats, cows, horses, rabbits, monkeys, and most preferably, humans. Diagnostic methods
Human neurotransmitter transporter also can be used in diagnostic assays for detecting diseases and abnormalities or susceptibility to diseases and abnormalities related to the presence of mutations in the nucleic acid sequences that encode the . protein. For example, differences can be determined between the cDNA or genomic sequence encoding neurotransmitter transporter in individuals afflicted with a disease an in normal individuals. If a mutation is observed in some or all of the afflicted individuals but not in normal individuals, then the mutation is likely to be the causative agent of the disease.
Sequence differences between a reference gene and a gene having mutations can be revealed by the direct DNA sequencing method. In addition, cloned DNA segments can be employed as probes to detect specific DNA segments. The sensitivity of this method is greatly enhanced when combined with PCR. For example, a sequencing primer can be used with a double-stranded PCR product or a single-stranded template molecule generated by a modified PCR. The sequence determination is performed by conventional procedures using radiolabeled nucleotides or by automatic sequencing procedures using fluorescent tags.
Genetic testing based on DNA sequence differences can be carried put by detection of alteration in electrophoretic mobility of DNA fragments in gels with or without denaturing agents. Small sequence deletions and insertions can be visualized, for example, by high resolution gel electrophoresis. DNA fragments of different sequences can be distinguished on denaturing formamide gradient gels in which the mobilities of different DNA fragments are retarded in the gel at different positions according to their specific melting or partial melting temperatures (see, e.g., Myers et al, Science 230, 1242, 1985). Sequence changes at specific locations can also be revealed by nuclease protection assays, such as RNase and S 1 protection or the chemical cleavage method (e.g., Cotton et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. USA 85,
4397-4401, 1985). Thus, the detection of a specific DNA sequence can be performed by methods such as hybridization, RNase protection, chemical cleavage, direct DNA sequencing or the use of restriction enzymes and Southern blotting of genomic DNA. In addition to direct methods such as gel-electrophoresis and DNA sequencing, mutations can also be detected by in situ analysis.
Altered levels of neurotransmitter transporter also can be detected in various tissues. Assays used to detect levels of the receptor polypeptides in a body sample, such as blood or a tissue biopsy, derived from a host are well known to those of skill in the art and include radioimmunoassays, competitive binding assays, Western blot analysis, and ELISA assays.
All patents and patent applications cited in this disclosure are expressly incorporated herein by reference. The above disclosure generally describes the present invention. A more complete understanding can be obtained by reference to the following specific examples, which are provided for purposes of illustration only and are not intended to limit the scope of the invention.
EXAMPLE 1
Detection of neurotransmitter transporter activity
The polynucleotide of SEQ ID NO: 3 (and 4) is inserted into the expression vector pCEV4 and the expression vector pCEV4 neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide obtained is transfected into human embryonic kidney 293 cells. Successful transfection is examined 2 days post-transfection by a 15-min specific uptake of either 10 n M [2,5,6-H] norepinephrine ([3H]NE) or 10 n M [3H]DA in transiently transfected 239 cells. Specificity of uptake is assessed by parallel uptake assays in the presence of 10 μM nisoxetine (RBI) or GBR- 12909 (RBI), specific inhibitors of NET and DAT, respectively. It is shown that the polypeptide of SEQ ID NO: 2 (and 5) have neurotransmitter transporter activity.
EXAMPLE 2
Expression of recombinant human neurotransmitter transporter
The Pichia pastoris expression vector pPICZB (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) is used to produce large quantities of recombinant human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides in yeast. The neurotransmitter transporter-encoding DNA sequence is derived from SEQ ID NO: 1 or 4. Before insertion into vector pPICZB, the DNA sequence is modified by well known methods in such a way that it contains at its
5 '-end an initiation codon and at its 3 '-end an enterokinase cleavage site, a His6 reporter tag and a termination codon. Moreover, at both termini recognition sequences for restriction endonucleases are added and after digestion of the multiple cloning site of pPICZ B with the conesponding restriction enzymes the modified
DNA sequence is ligated into pPICZB. This expression vector is designed for inducible expression in Pichia pastoris, driven by a yeast promoter. The resulting pPICZ/md-His6 vector is used to transform the yeast. The yeast is cultivated under' usual conditions in 5 liter shake flasks and the recombinantly produced protein isolated from the culture by affinity chromatography (Ni-NTA-Resin) in the presence of 8 M urea. The bound polypeptide is eluted with buffer, pH 3.5, and neutralized. Separation of the polypeptide from the His6 reporter tag is accomplished by site-specific proteolysis using enterokinase (Invitrogen, San Diego, CA) according to manufacturer's instructions. Purified human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is obtained.
EXAMPLE 3
Identification of test compounds that bind to neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides
Purified neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides comprising a glutathione-S- transferase protein and absorbed onto glutathione-derivatized wells of 96-well microtiter plates are contacted with test compounds from a small molecule library at pH 7.0 in a physiological buffer solution. Human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptides comprise the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2 or 5. The test compounds comprise a fluorescent tag. The samples are incubated for 5 minutes to one hour. Control samples are incubated in the absence of a test compound.
The buffer solution containing the test compounds is washed from the wells. Binding of a test compound to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide is detected by fluorescence measurements of the contents of the wells. A test compound that increases the fluorescence in a well by at least 15%> relative to fluorescence of a well in which a test compound is not incubated is identified as a compound which binds to a human neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide. EXAMPLE 4
Identification of a test compound which decreases neurotransmitter transporter gene expression
A test compound is administered to a culture of human cells transfected with a neurotransmitter transporter expression construct and incubated at 37°C for 10 to 45 minutes. A culture of the same type of cells that have not been transfected is incubated for the same time without the test compound to provide a negative control. RNA is isolated from the two cultures as described in Chirgwin et al, Biochem. 18,
5294-99, 1979). Northern blots are prepared using 20 to 30 μg total RNA and hybridized with a 32P-labeled neurotransmitter transporter-specific probe at 65°C in Express-hyb (CLONTECH). The probe comprises at least 11 contiguous nucleotides selected from the complement of SEQ ID NO: 1, 3 or 4. A test compound that decreases the neurotransmitter transporter-specific signal relative to the signal obtained in the absence of the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of neurotransmitter transporter gene expression.
EXAMPLE 5
Identification of a test compound which decreases neurotransmitter transporter activity
A test compound is administered to a culture of human cells transfected with a neurotransmitter transporter expression construct and incubated at 37°C for 10 to 45 minutes. A culture of the same type of cells that have not been transfected is incubated for the same time without the test compound to provide a negative control.
Functional activity is measured by assessing neurotransmitter uptake, as is known in the art. A test compound which decreases the functional activity of the neurotransmitter transporter relative to the functional activity in the absence of the test compound is identified as an inhibitor of neurotransmitter transporter activity.
EXAMPLE 6
Tissue-specific expression of neurotransmitter transporter
The qualitative expression pattern of neurotransmitter transporter in various tissues is determined by Reverse Transcription-Polymerase Chain Reaction (RT-PCR).
Quantitative expression profiling
To demonstrate that neurotransmitter transporter is involved in cancer, expression is determined in the following tissues: adrenal gland, bone marrow, brain, cerebellum, colon, fetal brain, fetal liver, heart, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, placenta, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle, small intestine, spinal cord, spleen, stomach, testis, thymus, thyroid, trachea, uterus, and peripheral blood lymphocytes. Expression in the following cancer cell lines also is determined: DU- 145 (prostate), NCI-H125 (lung), HT-29 (colon), COLO-205 (colon), A-549 (lung),
NCI-H460 (lung), HT-116 (colon), DLD-1 (colon), MDA-MD-231 (breast), LS174T (colon), ZF-75 (breast), MDA-MN-435 (breast), HT-1080, MCF-7 (breast), and U87. Matched pairs of malignant and normal tissue from the same patient also are tested.
To demonstrate that neurotransmitter transporter is involved in CNS disorders, the following tissues are screened: fetal and adult brain, muscle, heart, lung, kidney, liver, thymus, testis, colon, placenta, trachea, pancreas, kidney, gastric mucosa, colon, liver, cerebellum, skin, cortex (Alzheimer's and normal), hypothalamus, cortex, amygdala, cerebellum, hippocampus, choroid, plexus, thalamus, and spinal cord. To demonstrate that neurotransmitter transporter is involved in the disease process of asthma, the following whole body panel is screened to show predominant or relatively high expression in lung or immune tissues: brain, heart, kidney, liver, lung, trachea, bone manow, colon, small intestine, spleen, stomach, thymus, mammary gland, skeletal muscle, prostate, testis, uterus, cerebellum, fetal brain, fetal liver, spinal cord, placenta, adrenal gland, pancreas, salivary gland, thyroid, peripheral blood leukocytes, lymph node, and tonsil. Once this is established, the following lung and immune system cells are screened to localize expression to particular cell subsets: lung micro vascular endothelial cells, bronchial/tracheal epithelial cells, bronchial/tracheal smooth muscle cells, lung fibroblasts, T cells (T helper 1 subset, T helper 2 subset, NKT cell subset, and cytotoxic T lymphocytes), B cells, mononuclear cells (monocytes and macrophages), mast cells, eosinophils, neutrophils, and dendritic cells. As a final step, the expression of neurotransmitter transporter in cells derived from normal individuals with the expression of cells derived from asthmatic individuals is compared.
To demonstrate that neurotransmitter transporter is involved in the disease process of COPD, the initial expression panel consists of RNA samples from respiratory tissues and inflammatory cells relevant to COPD: lung (adult and fetal), trachea, freshly isolated alveolar type II cells, cultured human bronchial epithelial cells, cultured small airway epithelial cells, cultured bronchial sooth muscle cells, cultured H441 cells (Clara-like), freshly isolated neutrophils and monocytes, and cultured monocytes (macrophage-like). Body map profiling also is carried out, using total RNA panels purchased from Clontech. The tissues are adrenal gland, bone manow, brain, colon, heart, kidney, liver, lung, mammary gland, pancreas, prostate, salivary gland, skeletal muscle, small intestine, spleen, stomach, testis, thymus, trachea, thyroid, and uterus.
Quantitative expression profiling is performed by the form of quantitative PCR analysis called "kinetic analysis" firstly described in Higuchi et al, BioTechnology
10, 413-17, 1992, and Higuchi et al, BioTechnology 11, 1026-30, 1993. The principle is that at any given cycle within the exponential phase of PCR, the amount of product is proportional to the initial number of template copies.
If the amplification is performed in the presence of an internally quenched fluorescent oligonucleotide (TaqMan probe) complementary to the target sequence, the probe is cleaved by the 5 '-3' endonuclease activity of Taq DNA polymerase and a fluorescent dye released in the medium (Holland et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 88, 7276-80, 1991). Because the fluorescence emission will increase in direct proportion to the amount of the specific amplified product, the exponential growth phase of PCR product can be detected and used to determine the initial template concentration (Heid et al, Genome Res. 6, 986-94, 1996, and Gibson et al, Genome Res. 6, 995-1001, 1996).
The amplification of an endogenous control can be performed to standardize the amount of sample RNA added to a reaction. In this kind of experiment, the control of choice is the 18S ribosomal RNA. Because reporter dyes with differing emission spectra are available, the target and the endogenous control can be independently quantified in the same tube if probes labeled with different dyes are used.
All "real time PCR" measurements of fluorescence are made in the ABI Prism 7700.
RNA extraction and cDNA preparation. Total RNA from the tissues listed above are used for expression quantification. RNAs labeled "from autopsy" were extracted from autoptic tissues with the TRIzol reagent (Life Technologies, MD) according to the manufacturer's protocol.
Fifty μg of each RNA were treated with DNase I for 1 hour at 37°C in the following reaction mix: 0.2 U/μl RNase-free DNase I (Roche Diagnostics, Germany); 0.4 U/μl RNase inhibitor (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); 10 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.9; lOmM MgCl2; 50 mM NaCl; and 1 mM DTT. After incubation, RNA is extracted once with 1 volume of phenolxhloroform:- isoamyl alcohol (24:24:1) and once with chloroform, and precipitated with 1/10 volume of 3 M sodium acetate, pH5.2, and 2 volumes of ethanol.
Fifty μg of each RNA from the autoptic tissues are DNase treated with the DNA-free kit purchased from Ambion (Ambion, TX). After resuspension and spectro- photometric quantification, each sample is reverse transcribed with the TaqMan Reverse Transcription Reagents (PE Applied Biosystems, CA) according to the manufacturer's protocol. The final concentration of RNA in the reaction mix is 200 ng/μL. Reverse transcription is carried out with 2.5 μM of random hexamer primers.
TaqMan quantitative analysis. Specific primers and probe are designed according to the recommendations of PE Applied Biosystems; the probe can be labeled at the 5' end FAM (6-carboxy-fluorescein) and at the 3' end with TAMRA (6-carboxy- tetramethyl-rhodamine). Quantification experiments are performed on 10 ng of reverse transcribed RNA from each sample. Each determination is done in triplicate.
Total cDNA content is normalized with the simultaneous quantification (multiplex PCR) of the 18S ribosomal RNA using the Pre-Developed TaqMan Assay Reagents
(PDAR) Control Kit (PE Applied Biosystems, CA).
The assay reaction mix is as follows: IX final TaqMan Universal PCR Master Mix (from 2X stock) (PE Applied Biosystems, CA); IX PDAR control - 18S RNA (from 20X stock); 300 nM forward primer; 900 nM reverse primer; 200 nM probe; 10 ng cDNA; and water to 25 μl.
Each of the following steps are carried out once: pre PCR, 2 minutes at 50°C, and 10 minutes at 95°C. The following steps are carried out 40 times: denaturation, 15 seconds at 95°C, annealing/extension, 1 minute at 60°C. The experiment is performed on an ABI Prism 7700 Sequence Detector (PE Applied Biosystems, CA). At the end of the run, fluorescence data acquired during PCR are processed as described in the ABI Prism 7700 user's manual in order to achieve better background subtraction as well as signal linearity with the starting target quantity.
EXAMPLE 7
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
Pain
Acute pain. Acute pain is measured on a hot plate mainly in rats. Two variants of hot plate testing are used: In the classical variant animals are put on a hot surface (52 to 56°C) and the latency time is measured until the animals show nocifensive behavior, such as stepping or foot licking. The other variant is an increasing temperature hot plate where the experimental animals are put on a surface of neutral temperature. Subsequently this surface is slowly but constantly heated until the animals begin to lick a hind paw. The temperature which is reached when hind paw licking begins is a measure for pain threshold.
Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated control group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
Persistent pain. Persistent pain is measured with the formalin or capsaicin test, mainly in rats. A solution of 1 to 5% formalin or 10 to 100 μg capsaicin is injected into one hind paw of the experimental animal. After formalin or capsaicin application the animals show nocifensive reactions like flinching, licking and biting of the affected paw. The number of nocifensive reactions within a time frame of up to 90 minutes is a measure for intensity of pain. Compounds are tested against a vehicle treated control group. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to formalin or capsaicin administration.
Neuropathic pain. Neuropathic pain is induced by different variants of unilateral sciatic nerve injury mainly in rats. The operation is performed under anesthesia. The first variant of sciatic nerve injury is produced by placing loosely constrictive ligatures around the common sciatic nerve. The second variant is the tight ligation of about the half of the diameter of the common sciatic nerve. In the next variant, a group of models is used in which tight ligations or transections are made of either the L5 and L6 spinal nerves, or the L%> spinal nerve only. The fourth variant involves an axotomy of two of the three terminal branches of the sciatic nerve (tibial and common peroneal nerves) leaving the remaining sural nerve intact whereas the last variant comprises the axotomy of only the tibial branch leaving the sural and common nerves uninjured. Control animals are treated with a sham operation.
Postoperatively, the nerve injured animals develop a chronic mechanical allodynia, cold allodynioa, as well as a thermal hyperalgesia. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC
Inc-Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA, USA; Electronic von Frey System, Somedic Sales AB, Hόrby, Sweden). Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy), or by means of a cold plate of 5 to 10°C where the nocifensive reactions of the affected hind paw are counted as a measure of pain intensity. A further test for cold induced pain is the counting of nocifensive reactions, or duration of nocifensive responses after plantar administration of acetone to the affected hind limb. Chronic pain in general is assessed by registering the circadanian rhythms in activity (Surjo and Arndt, Universitat zu Kδln, Cologne, Germany), and by scoring differences in gait (foot print patterns; FOOTPRINTS program, Klapdor et al, 1997. A low cost method to analyze footprint patterns. J. Neurosci. Methods 75, 49-54). Compounds are tested against sham operated and vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
Inflammatory Pain. Inflammatory pain is induced mainly in rats by injection of 0.75 mg canageenan or complete Freund's adjuvant into one hind paw. The animals develop an edema with mechanical allodynia as well as thermal hyperalgesia. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc-Life Science Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA,
USA). Thermal hyperalgesia is measured by means of a radiant heat source (Plantar Test, Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy, Paw thermal stimulator, G. Ozaki, University of California, USA). For edema measurement two methods are being used. In the first method, the animals are sacrificed and the affected hindpaws sectioned and weighed. The second method comprises differences in paw volume by measuring water displacement in a plethysmometer (Ugo Basile, Comerio, Italy).
Compounds are tested against uninflamed as well as vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing.
Diabetic neuropathic pain. Rats treated with a single intraperitoneal injection of 50 to 80 mg/kg streptozotocin develop a profound hyperglycemia and mechanical allodynia within 1 to 3 weeks. Mechanical allodynia is measured by means of a pressure transducer (electronic von Frey Anesthesiometer, IITC Inc-Life Science
Instruments, Woodland Hills, SA, USA).
Compounds are tested against diabetic and non-diabetic vehicle treated control groups. Substance application is performed at different time points via different application routes (i.v, i.p, p.o, i.t, i.c.v, s.c, intradermal, transdermal) prior to pain testing. Parkinson's disease
6-Hydroxydopamine (6-OH-DA) Lesion. Degeneration of the dopaminergic ni- grostriatal and striatopallidal pathways is the central pathological event in
Parkinson's disease. This disorder has been mimicked experimentally in rats using single/sequential unilateral stereotaxic injections of 6-OH-DA into the medium forebrain bundle (MFB).
Male Wistar rats (Harlan Winkelmann, Germany), weighing 200±250 g at the beginning of the experiment, are used. The rats are maintained in a temperature- and humidity-controlled environment under a 12 h light/dark cycle with free access to food and water when not in experimental sessions. The following in vivo protocols are approved by the governmental authorities. All efforts are made to minimize animal suffering, to reduce the number of animals used, and to utilize alternatives to in vivo techniques.
Animals are administered pargyline on the day of surgery (Sigma, St. Louis, MO, USA; 50 mg/kg i.p.) in order to inhibit metabolism of 6-OHDA by monoamine oxidase and desmethylimipramine HCl (Sigma; 25 mg/kg i.p.) in order to prevent uptake of 6-OHDA by noradrenergic terminals. Thirty minutes later the rats are anesthetized with sodium pentobarbital (50 mg/kg) and placed in a stereotaxic frame. In order to lesion the DA nigrostriatal pathway 4 μl of 0.01 %> ascorbic acid-saline containing 8 μg of 6-OHDA HBr (Sigma) are injected into the left medial fore-brain bundle at a rate of 1 μl/min (2.4 mm anterior, 1.49 mm lateral, -2.7 mm ventral to
Bregma and the skull surface). The needle is left in place an additional 5 min to allow diffusion to occur.
Stepping Test. Forelimb akinesia is assessed three weeks following lesion placement using a modified stepping test protocol. In brief, the animals are held by the experimenter with one hand fixing the hindlimbs and slightly raising the hind part above the surface. One paw is touching the table, and is then moved slowly sideways (5 s for 1 m), first in the forehand and then in the backhand direction. The number of adjusting steps is counted for both paws in the backhand and forehand direction of movement. The sequence of testing is right paw forehand and backhand adjusting stepping, followed by left paw forehand and backhand directions. The test is repeated three times on three consecutive days, after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing. Forehand adjusted stepping reveals no consistent differences between lesioned and healthy control animals. Analysis is therefore restricted to backhand adjusted stepping.
Balance Test. Balance adjustments following postural challenge are also measured during the stepping test sessions. The rats are held in the same position as described in the stepping test and, instead of being moved sideways, tilted by the experimenter towards the side of the paw touching the table. This maneuver results in loss of balance and the ability of the rats to regain balance by forelimb movements is scored on a scale ranging from 0 to 3. Score 0 is given for a normal forelimb placement. When the forelimb movement is delayed but recovery of postural balance detected, score 1 is given. Score 2 represents a clear, yet insufficient, forelimb reaction, as evidenced by muscle contraction, but lack of success in recovering balance, and score 3 is given for no reaction of movement. The test is repeated three times a day on each side for three consecutive days after an initial training period of three days prior to the first testing.
Staircase Test (Paw Reaching). A modified version of the staircase test is used for evaluation of paw reaching behavior three weeks following primary and secondary lesion placement. Plexiglass test boxes with a central platform and a removable staircase on each side are used. The apparatus is designed such that only the paw on the same side at each staircase can be used, thus providing a measure of independent forelimb use. For each test the animals are left in the test boxes for 15 min. The double staircase is filled with 7 x 3 chow pellets (Precision food pellets, formula: P, purified rodent diet, size 45 mg; Sandown Scientific) on each side. After each test the number of pellets eaten (successfully retrieved pellets) and the number of pellets taken (touched but dropped) for each paw and the success rate (pellets eaten/pellets taken) are counted separately. After three days of food deprivation (12 g per animal per day) the animals are tested for 11 days. Full analysis is conducted only for the last five days.
MPTP treatment. The neurotoxin l-methyl-4-phenyl-l,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridine (MPTP) causes degeneration of mesencephalic dopaminergic (DAergic) neurons in rodents, non-human primates, and humans and, in so doing, reproduces many of the symptoms of Parkinson's disease. MPTP leads to a marked decrease in the levels of dopamine and its metabolites, and in the number of dopaminergic terminals in the striatum as well as severe loss of the tyrosine hydroxylase (TH)-immunoreactive cell bodies in the substantia nigra, pars compacta.
In order to obtain severe and long-lasting lesions, and to reduce mortality, animals receive single injections of MPTP, and are then tested for severity of lesion 7-10 days later. Successive MPTP injections are administered on days 1, 2 and 3. Animals receive application of 4 mg/kg MPTP hydrochloride (Sigma) in saline once daily. All injections are intraperitoneal (i.p.) and the MPTP stock solution is frozen between injections. Animals are decapitated on day 11.
Immunohistology. At the completion of behavioral experiments, all animals are anaesthetized with 3 ml thiopental (1 g/40 ml i.p, Tyrol Pharma). The mice are perfused transcardially with 0.01 M PBS (pH 7.4) for 2 min, followed by 4% paraformaldehyde (Merck) in PBS for 15 min. The brains are removed and placed in
4% paraformaldehyde for 24 h at 4°C. For dehydration they are then fransfened to a 20% sucrose (Merck) solution in 0.1 M PBS at 4°C until they sink. The brains are frozen in methylbutan at -20°C for 2 min and stored at -70°C. Using a sledge microtome (mod. 3800-Frigocut, Leica), 25 μm sections are taken from the genu of the corpus callosum (AP 1.7 mm) to the hippocampus (AP 21.8 mm) and from AP 24.16 to AP 26.72. Forty-six sections are cut and stored in assorters in 0.25 M Tris buffer (pH 7.4) for immunohistochemistry.
A series of sections is processed for free-floating tyrosine hydroxylase (TH) immunohistochemistry. Following three rinses in 0.1 M PBS, endogenous peroxidase activity is quenched for 10 min in 0.3%> H2O2 ±PBS. After rinsing in PBS, sections are preincubated in 10% normal bovine serum (Sigma) for 5 min as blocking agent and fransfened to either primary anti-rat TH rabbit antiserum (dilution 1:2000).
Following overnight incubation at room temperature, sections for TH irnmuno- reactivity are rinsed in PBS (2 xlO min) and incubated in biotinylated anti-rabbit immunoglobulin G raised in goat (dilution 1:200) (Vector) for 90 min, rinsed repeatedly and fransfened to Vectastain ABC (Vector) solution for 1 h. 3,.3' -Diaminobenzidine tetrahydrochloride (DAB; Sigma) in 0.1 M PBS, supplemented with 0.005% H2O2, serves as chromogen in the subsequent visualization reaction. Sections are mounted on to gelatin-coated slides, left to dry overnight, counter- stained with hematoxylin dehydrated in ascending alcohol concentrations and cleared in butylacetate. Coverslips are mounted on entellan.
Rotarod Test. We use a modification of the procedure described by Rozas and Labandeira-Garcia (1997), with a CR-1 Rotamex system (Columbus Instruments, Columbus, OH) comprising an IBM-compatible personal computer, a CIO-24 data acquisition card, a control unit, and a four-lane rotarod unit. The rotarod unit consists of a rotating spindle (diameter 7.3 cm) and individual compartments for each mouse.
The system software allows preprogramming of session protocols with varying rotational speeds (0-80 rpm). Infrared beams are used to detect when a mouse has fallen onto the base grid beneath the rotarod. The system logs the fall as the end of the experiment for that mouse, and the total time on the rotarod, as well as the time of the fall and all the set-up parameters, are recorded. The system also allows a weak cunent to be passed through the base grid, to aid training. Dementia
The object recognition task. The object recognition task has been designed to assess the effects of experimental manipulations on the cognitive performance of rodents. A rat is placed in an open field, in which two identical objects are present. The rats inspects both objects during the first trial of the object recognition task. In a second trial, after a retention interval of for example 24 hours, one of the two objects used in the first trial, the 'familiar' object, and a novel object are placed in the open field. The inspection time at each of the objects is registered. The basic measures in the OR task is the time spent by a rat exploring the two object the second trial. Good retention is reflected by higher exploration times towards the novel than the 'familiar' object.
Administration of the putative cognition enhancer prior to the first trial predominantly allows assessment of the effects on acquisition, and eventually on consolidation processes. Administration of the testing compound after the first trial allows to assess the effects on consolidation processes, whereas administration before the second trial allows to measure effects on retrieval processes.
The passive avoidance task. The passive avoidance task assesses memory performance in rats and mice. The inhibitory avoidance apparatus consists of a two-compartment box with a light compartment and a dark compartment. The two compartments are separated by a guillotine door that can be operated by the experimenter. A threshold of 2 cm separates . the two compartments when the guillotine door is raised. When the door is open, the illumination in the dark compartment is about 2 lux. The light intensity is about 500 lux at the center of the floor of the light compartment.
Two habituation sessions, one shock session, and a retention session are given, separated by inter-session intervals of 24 hours. In the habituation sessions and the retention session the rat is allowed to explore the apparatus for 300 sec. The rat is placed in the light compartment, facing the wall opposite to the guillotine door. After an accommodation period of 15 sec the guillotine door is opened so that all parts of the apparatus can be visited freely. Rats normally avoid brightly lit areas and will enter the dark compartment within a few seconds.
In the shock session the guillotine door between the compartments is lowered as soon as the rat has entered the dark compartment with its four paws, and a scrambled 1 mA footshock is administered for 2 sec. The rat is removed from the apparatus and put back into its home cage. The procedure during the retention session is identical to that of the habituation sessions.
The step-through latency, that is the first latency of entering the dark compartment (in sec.) during the retention session is an index of the memory performance of the animal; the longer the latency to enter the dark compartment, the better the retention is. A testing compound in given half an hour before the shock session, together with 1 mg*kg_1 scopolamine. Scopolamine impairs the memory performance during the retention session 24 hours later. If the test compound increases the enter latency compared with the scopolamine-treated controls, is likely to possess cognition enhancing potential.
The Morris water escape task. The Morris water escape task measures spatial orientation learning in rodents. It is a test system that has extensively been used to investigate the effects of putative therapeutic on the cognitive functions of rats and mice. The performance of an animal is assessed in a circular water tank with an escape -platform that is submerged about 1 cm below the surface of the water. The escape platform is not visible for an animal swimming in the water tank. Abundant extra-maze cues are provided by the furniture in the room, including desks, computer equipment, a second water tank, the presence of the experimenter, and by a radio on a shelf that is playing softly. The animals receive four trials during five daily acquisition sessions. A trial is started by placing an animal into the pool, facing the wall of the tank. Each of four starting positions in the quadrants north, east, south, and west is used once in a series of four trials; their order is randomized. The escape platform is always in the same position. A trial is terminated as soon as the animal had climbs onto the escape platform or when 90 seconds have elapsed, whichever event occurs first. The animal is allowed to stay on the platform for 30 seconds. Then it is taken from the platform and the next trial is started. If an animal did not find the platform within 90 seconds it is put on the platform by the experimenter and is allowed to stay there for 30 seconds. After the fourth trial of the fifth daily session, an additional trial is given as a probe trial: the platform is removed, and the time the animal spends in the four quadrants is measured for 30 or 60 seconds. In the probe trial, all animals start from the same start position, opposite to the quadrant where the escape platform had been positioned during acquisition.
Four different measures are taken to evaluate the performance of an animal during acquisition training: escape latency, traveled distance, distance to platform, and- swimming speed. The following measures are evaluated for the probe trial: time (s) in quadrants and traveled distance (cm) in the four quadrants. The probe trial provides additional information about how well an animal learned the position of the escape platform. If an animal spends more time and swims a longer distance in the quadrant where the platform had been positioned during the acquisition sessions than in any other quadrant, one concludes that the platform position has been learned well.
In order to assess the effects of putative cognition enhancing compounds, rats or mice with specific brain lesions which impair cognitive functions, or animals treated with compounds such as scopolamine or MK-801, which interfere with normal learning, or aged animals which suffer from cognitive deficits, are used.
The T-maze spontaneous alternation task. The T-maze spontaneous alternation task
(TeMCAT) assesses the spatial memory performance in mice. The start arm and the two goal arms of the T-maze are provided with guillotine doors which can be operated manually by the experimenter. A mouse is put into the start arm at the beginning of training. The guillotine door is closed. In the first trial, the 'forced trial', either the left or right goal arm is blocked by lowering the guillotine door. After the mouse has been released from the start arm, it will negotiate the maze, eventually enter the open goal arm, and return to the start position, where it will be confined for 5 seconds, by lowering the guillotine door. Then, the animal can choose freely between the left and right goal arm (all guillotine-doors opened) during 14 'free choice' trials. As soon a the mouse has entered one goal arm, the other one is closed. The mouse eventually returns to the start arm and is free to visit whichever go alarm it wants after having been confined to the start arm for 5 seconds. After completion of 14 free choice trials in one session, the animal is removed from the maze. During training, the animal is never handled.
The percent alternations out of 14 trials is calculated. This percentage and the total time needed to complete the first forced trial and the subsequent 14 free choice trials (in s) is analyzed. Cognitive deficits are usually induced by an injection of scopolamine, 30 min before the start of the training session. Scopolamine reduced the per-cent alternations to chance level, or below. A cognition enhancer, which is always administered before the training session, will at least partially, antagonize the scopolamine-induced reduction in the spontaneous alternation rate.
EXAMPLE 8
Genitourinary diseases: In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
Bladder outlet obstruction model
Wistar rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized intraperitoneally with ketamine. The abdomen is opened through a midline incision and the bladder and the proximal urethra are exposed. A constant degree of urethral obstruction is produced by tying a ligature around the urethra and a catheter with an outer diameter of 1 mm. The abdominal well is closed and the animals allowed to recover. After 6 weeks, the rats are anesthetized with ketamine, and the ligature around the urethra is carefully removed to normalize the outlet resistance and enable repetitive micturition. A polyethylene catheter is implanted in the bladder through the dome, and exteriorized at the scapular level. Animals are then allowed to recover for at least 48 hours.
Cytometric investigation is performed without anesthesia two days after bladder catheter implantation in control and obstructed animals. The bladder catheter was connected via a T-tube to a strain gauge and a microinjection pump. The conscious rats are held under partial restraint in a restraining device. Warmed saline is infused into the bladder at a rate of 3 ml/hr for control and obstructed animals. The rate of infusion is increased from 3 to 10 ml/hr to obtain similar interval times between micturitions in obstructed and control rats. Overactivity of the obstructed bladders is assessed by measuring the cystometric parameters such as basal pressure, peak micturition pressure, threshold pressure, micturition interval, amplitude and frequency of spontaneous activity and micturition slope. Lluel et al, J. Urol 160, 2253-57, 1998.
A test compound is dissolved in an appropriate vehicle, such as a mixture of ethanol,
Tween 80 (ICN Biomedicals Inc.), and saline (1:1:8, v/v/v), is administered intravenously through the catheter.
EXAMPLE 9
Genitourinary diseases: In vivo testing of compounds/target validation Organ bath assay for measuring agonist-induced contraction of prostate
An organ bath assay is employed to measure the agonist-induced contraction of prostate for assessing the biological activity of test compounds (i.e., drug candidates). Male Wistar rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized with ether and sacrificed by dislocating the necks. The whole prostate is excised and placed in oxygenated Modified Krebs-Henseleit solution (pH 7.4) of the following composition (112 mM NaCl, 5.9 mM KC1, 1.2 mM MgCl2, 1.2 mM NaH2PO4, 2 mM CaCl , 2.5 mM NaHCO3, 12mM glucose). Ventricle prostate lobes were dissected into several strips depending on the size of prostate. Prostate strips are equilibrated for 60 min in organ bath chambers before any stimulation.
Isometric tension is recorded under an appropriate load. Contractile response to adrenergic agonists or electric field stimulation is determined several times until reproducible responses are obtained. Test compounds are pre-incubated prior to the agonistic or electric stimulation. The ratio of each contraction to the negative control is calculated and the effect of the test compounds on the prostate contraction is evaluated.
EXAMPLE 10
Genitourinary diseases: In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
Organ bath assay for measuring agonist-induced contraction of urinary bladder
An organ bath assay is employed to measure the agonist-induced contraction of urinary bladder for assessing the biological activity of test compounds (i.e., drug candidates). Male Wistar rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are anesthetized with ether and sacrificed by dislocating the necks. The whole urinary bladder is excised and placed in oxygenated Modified Krebs-Henseleit solution (pH 7.4) of the following composition (112 mM NaCl, 5.9 mM KC1, 1.2 mM MgCl2, 1.2 mM NaH2PO4, 2 mM CaCl2, 2.5 mM NaHCO3, 12 mM glucose).
Isometric tension is recorded under an appropriate load using longitudinal strips of rat detrusor muscle. Bladder strips are equilibrated for 60 minutes before each stimulation. Contractile response to 80 mM KC1 is determined at 15 minute intervals until reproducible responses are obtained. The response to KC1 is used as an internal standard to evaluate the effect of test compounds. The effects of test compounds are investigated by incubating the strips with compounds for 30 minutes prior to stimulation with an appropriate agonist or electrical stimulation. One of the preparations made from the same animal serves as a control, while others are used for evaluating test compounds. The ratio of each contraction to the internal standard (e.g., a KCl-induced contraction) is calculated, and the effects of the test compounds on the contraction are evaluated.
EXAMPLE 11
Genitourinary diseases: In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
1. Animals. Female Sprague-Dawley rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are used.
2. Catheter implantation. Rats are anesthetized by intraperitoneal administration of urethane (Sigma) at 1.25 g/kg. The abdomen is opened through a midline incision, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) is implanted into the bladder through the dome. In parallel, the inguinal region is incised, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) filled with saline (Otsuka) is inserted into a femoral vein.
3. Investigation of bladder contraction. The bladder is filled via the catheter by incremental volume of saline until spontaneous bladder contractions occur. The intravesicular pressure is measured a pressure transducer and displayed continuously on a chart recorder. The activity of test compounds is assessed after intravenous administration through a polyethylene cannula inserted into the femoral vein. Measurement of bladder cystometry in conscious rats
1. Animals. Female Sprague-Dawley rats (200-250 g / Charles River Japan) are used.
2. Catheter implantation. Rats are anesthetized by intramuscular administration of ketamine (75 mg/kg) and xylazine (15 mg/kg). The abdomen is opened through a midline incision, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) is implanted into the bladder through the dome. The catheter is tunneled through subcutis of the animal by needle (14G) to neck.
In parallel, the inguinal region is incised, and a polyethylene catheter (BECTON DICKINSON, PE50) filled with saline (Otsuka) is inserted into a femoral vein. The catheter is tunneled through subcutis of the animal by needle to neck.
3. Cystometric investigation. The bladder catheter is connected via T-tube to a pressure transducer (Viggo-Spectramed Pte Ltd, DT-XXAD) and a micro- injection pump (TERUMO). Saline is infused at room temperature into the bladder at a rate of 10 ml/hr. Intravesicular pressure is recorded continuously on a chart pen recorder (Yokogawa). At least three reproducible micturition cycles are recorded before a test compound administration.
4. Administration of test compounds. A test compound dissolved in the mixture of ethanol, Tween 80 (ICN Biomedicals Inc.) and saline (1 : 1 : 8, v/v/v) is administered intravenously through the catheter. EXAMPLE 12
Proliferation inhibition assay: Antisense oligonucleotides suppress the growth of cancer cell lines
The cell line used for testing is the human colon cancer cell line HCT116. Cells are cultured in RPMI-1640 with 10-15%) fetal calf serum at a concentration of 10,000 cells per milliliter in a volume of 0.5 ml and kept at 37°C in a 95% air/5%>CO2 atmosphere.
Phosphorothioate oligoribonucleotides are synthesized on an Applied Biosystems Model 380B DNA synthesizer using phosphoroamidite chemistry. A sequence of 24 bases complementary to the nucleotides at position 1 to 24 of SEQ ID NO: 1 is used as the test oligonucleotide. As a control, another (random) sequence is used: 5'-TCA ACT GAC TAG ATG TAC ATG GAC-3' (SEQ ID NO: 10). Following assembly and deprotection, oligonucleotides are ethanol-precipitated twice, dried, and suspended in phosphate buffered saline at the desired concentration. Purity of the oligonucleotides is tested by capillary gel electrophoresis and ion exchange HPLC. The purified oligonucleotides are added to the culture medium at a concentration of 10 μM once per day for seven days.
The addition of the test oligonucleotide for seven days results in significantly reduced expression of neurotransmitter transporter as determined by Western blotting. This effect is not observed with the control oligonucleotide. After 3 to 7 days, the number of cells in the cultures is counted using an automatic cell counter.
The number of cells in cultures treated with the test oligonucleotide (expressed as 100%)) is compared with the number of cells in cultures treated with the control oligonucleotide. The number of cells in cultures treated with the test oligonucleotide is not more than 30%> of control, indicating that the inhibition of neurotransmitter transporter has an anti-proliferative effect on cancer cells. EXAMPLE 13
Cancer: In vivo testing of compounds/target validation Acute Mechanistic Assays Reduction in Mitogenic Plasma Hormone Levels
This non-tumor assay measures the ability of a compound to reduce either the endogenous level of a circulating hormone or the level of hormone produced in response to a biologic stimulus. Rodents are administered test compound (p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c). At a predetermined time after administration of test compound, blood plasma is collected. Plasma is assayed for levels of the hormone of interest. If the normal circulating levels of the hormone are too low and/or variable to provide consistent results, the level of the hormone may be elevated by a pre-treatment with a biologic stimulus (i.e., LHRH may be injected i.m. into mice at a dosage of 30 ng/mouse to induce a burst of testosterone synthesis). The timing of plasma collection would be adjusted to coincide with the peak of the induced hormone response. Compound effects are compared to a vehicle-treated control group. An F- test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test. Significance is p value < 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
Hollow Fiber Mechanism of Action Assay
Hollow fibers are prepared with desired cell line(s) and implanted intraperitoneally and/or subcutaneously in rodents. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. Fibers are harvested in accordance with specific readout assay protocol, these may include assays for gene expression (bDNA, PCR, or Taqman), or a specific biochemical activity (i.e., cAMP levels. Results are analyzed by Student's t-test or Rank Sum test after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance at p < 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group. Subacute Functional In Vivo Assays
Reduction in Mass of Hormone Dependent Tissues
This is another non-tumor assay that measures the ability of a compound to reduce the mass of a hormone dependent tissue (i.e., seminal vesicles in males and uteri in females). Rodents are administered test compound (p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c.) according to a predetermined schedule and for a predetermined duration (i.e., 1 week). At termination of the study, animals are weighed, the target organ is excised, any fluid is expressed, and the weight of the organ is recorded. Blood plasma may also be collected. Plasma may be assayed for levels of a hormone of interest or for levels of test agent. Organ weights may be directly compared or they may be normalized for the body weight of the animal. Compound effects are compared to a vehicle-treated control group. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test. Significance is p value < 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
Hollow Fiber Proliferation Assay
Hollow fibers are prepared with desired cell line(s) and implanted intraperitoneally and/or subcutaneously in rodents. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. Fibers are harvested in accordance with specific readout assay protocol. Cell proliferation is determined by measuring a marker of cell number (i.e., MTT or LDH). The cell number and change in cell number from the starting inoculum are analyzed by Student's t-test or Rank Sum test after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance at p < 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group. Anti-angio genesis Models Corneal Angiogenesis
Hydron pellets with or without growth factors or cells are implanted into a micropocket surgically created in the rodent cornea. Compound administration may be systemic or local (compound mixed with growth factors in the hydron pellet). Corneas are harvested at 7 days post implantation immediately following intracardiac infusion of colloidal carbon and are fixed in 10%> formalin. Readout is qualitative scoring and/or image analysis. Qualitative scores are compared by Rank Sum test. Image analysis data is evaluated by measuring the area of neovascularization (in pixels) and group averages are compared by Student's t-test (2 tail). Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the growth factor or cells only group.
Matrigel Angiogenesis
Matrigel, containing cells or growth factors, is injected subcutaneously. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. Matrigel plugs are harvested at predetermined time point(s) and prepared for readout. Readout is an ELISA-based assay for hemoglobin concentration and/or histological examination (i.e. vessel count, special staining for endothelial surface markers: CD31, factor-8). Readouts are analyzed by Student's t-test, after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 as compared to the vehicle control group.
Primary Antitumor Efficacy
Early Therapy Models Subcutaneous Tumor
Tumor cells or fragments are implanted subcutaneously on Day 0. Vehicle and or compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule starting at a time, usually on Day 1, prior to the ability to measure the tumor burden. Body weights and tumor measurements are recorded 2-3 times weekly. Mean net body and tumor weights are calculated for each data collection day. Anti- rumor efficacy may be initially determined by comparing the size of treated (T) and control (C) tumors on a given day by a Student's t-test, after the variance between groups is compared by an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05. The experiment may also be continued past the end of dosing in which case tumor measurements would continue to be recorded to monitor tumor growth delay. Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan-
Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size. Significance is p < 0.05.
Intraperitoneal/Intracranial Tumor Models
Tumor cells are injected intraperitoneally or intracranially on Day 0. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule starting on Day 1. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded twice daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Morbidity/mortality data is expressed in terms of the median time of survival and the number of long- term survivors is indicated separately. Survival times are used to generate Kaplan- Meier curves. Significance is p < 0.05 by a log-rank test compared to the control group in the experiment.
Established Disease Model
Tumor cells or fragments are implanted subcutaneously and grown to the desired size for treatment to begin. Once at the predetermined size range, mice are randomized into treatment groups. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Tumor and body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. Mean tumor weights of all groups over days post inoculation are graphed for comparison. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the control group. Tumor measurements may be recorded after dosing has stopped to monitor tumor growth delay. Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan-Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size. Significance is p value < 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group.
Orthotopic Disease Models Mammary Fat Pad Assay
Tumor cells or fragments, of mammary adenocarcinoma origin, are implanted directly into a surgically exposed and reflected mammary fat pad in rodents. The fat pad is placed back in its original position and the surgical site is closed. Hormones may also be administered to the rodents to support the growth of the tumors. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Tumor and body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly.
Mean rumor weights of all groups over, days post inoculation are graphed for comparison. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the control group. '
Tumor measurements may be recorded after dosing has stopped to monitor tumor growth delay. Tumor growth delays are expressed as the difference in the median time for the treated and control groups to attain a predetermined size divided by the median time for the control group to attain that size. Growth delays are compared by generating Kaplan-Meier curves from the times for individual tumors to attain the evaluation size. Significance is p vafue< 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group. In addition, this model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ, or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
Intraprostatic Assay
Tumor cells or fragments, of prostatic adenocarcinoma origin, are implanted directly into a surgically exposed dorsal lobe of the prostate in rodents. The prostate is externalized through an abdominal incision so that the tumor can be implanted specifically in the dorsal lobe while verifying that the implant does not enter the seminal vesicles. The successfully inoculated prostate is replaced in the abdomen and the incisions through the abdomen and skin are closed. Hormones may also be administered to the rodents to support the growth of the tumors. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. At a predetermined time, the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected. The size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the. treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the control group. This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the lungs), or measuring the target organ weight (i.e., the regional lymph nodes). The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment. Intrabronchial Assay
Tumor cells of pulmonary origin may be implanted intrabronchially by making an incision through the skin and exposing the trachea. The trachea is pierced with the beveled end of a 25-gauge needle and the tumor cells are inoculated into the main bronchus using a flat-ended 27-gauge needle with a 90° bend. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. At a predetermined time, the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected. The size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t-test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the control group. This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the contralateral lung), or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
Intracecal Assay
Tumor cells of gastrointestinal origin may be implanted intracecally by making an abdominal incision through the skin and externalizing the intestine. Tumor cells are inoculated into the cecal wall without penetrating the lumen of the intestine using a 27 or 30 gauge needle. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Body weights are measured and recorded 2-3 times weekly. At a predetermined time, the experiment is terminated and the animal is dissected. The size of the primary tumor is measured in three dimensions using either a caliper or an ocular micrometer attached to a dissecting scope. An F-test is preformed to determine if the variance is equal or unequal followed by a Student's t- test to compare tumor sizes in the treated and control groups at the end of treatment. Significance is p < 0.05 as compared to the control group. This model provides an opportunity to increase the rate of spontaneous metastasis of this type of tumor. Metastasis can be assessed at termination of the study by counting the number of visible foci per target organ (i.e., the liver), or measuring the target organ weight. The means of these endpoints are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment.
Secondary (Metastatic) Antitumor Efficacy Spontaneous Metastasis
Tumor cells are inoculated s.c. and the tumors allowed to grow to a predetermined range for spontaneous metastasis studies to the lung or liver. These primary tumors are then excised. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule which may include the period leading up to the excision of the primary tumor to evaluate therapies directed at inhibiting the early stages of tumor metastasis. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Potential endpoints include survival time, numbers of visible foci per target organ, or target organ weight. When survival time is used as the endpoint the other values are not determined. Survival data is used to generate Kaplan-Meier curves. Significance is p < 0.05 by a log-rank test compared to the control group in the experiment. The mean number of visible tumor foci, as determined under a dissecting microscope, and the mean target organ weights are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance determined at p < 0.05 compared to the control group in the experiment for both of these endpoints. Forced Metastasis
Tumor cells are injected into the tail vein, portal vein, or the left ventricle of the heart in experimental (forced) lung, liver, and bone metastasis studies, respectively. Compounds are administered p.o, i.p, i.v, i.m, or s.c. according to a predetermined schedule. Observations of morbidity and/or mortality are recorded daily. Body weights are measured and recorded twice weekly. Potential endpoints include survival time, numbers of visible foci per target organ, or target organ weight. When survival time is used as the endpoint the other values are not determined. Survival data is used to generate Kaplan-Meier curves. Significance is p < 0.05 by a log-rank test compared to the control group in the experiment. The mean number of visible tumor foci, as determined under a dissecting microscope, and the mean target organ weights are compared by Student's t-test after conducting an F-test, with significance at p < 0.05 compared to the vehicle control group in the experiment for both endpoints.
EXAMPLE 14
Hematological diseases: In vitro testing of compounds/target validation Isolation ofCD34 cells
Mononuclear cells from fresh blood (cord blood, peripheral blood, bone manow) were separated by FicoU Paque® (1.077 density, Amersham-Pharmacia) density gradient centrifugation, and CD34+ cells were purified by immunomagnetic separation system (MiniMACS, Miltenyi Biotec), according to the manufacture's instructions (Direct CD34 Progenitor Cell Isolation Kit, Miltenyi Biotec). The percentage of CD34+ cells were generally from 90-95%>. Erythropoiesis/ Anemia Erythroid CD34+ Liquid Culture
1-2 x 104 CD34+ cells were plated in triplicate in 24-well plates with 1 ml Iscoves modified Dulbecco medium (IMDM) (Invitrogen) containing 10%> fetal bovine serum
(FCS, Invitrogen), 1%> Glutamine (Invitrogen) supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml) (PeproTech), different concentration of Erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) (Erypo® FS 4000, Cilag) with or without compounds. Control cells were incubated with 0.1- 0.2% DMSO instead of compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%o CO2. After 9 to 14 days cells were harvested, counted and stained with phycoerythrin (PE)-conjugated mAb against Glycophorin A (Pharmingen) to analyze differentiation.
Erythroid Colony-forming assay
Five hundred CD34+ cells/ml were plated in triplicate 24-well plates with 1% methylcellulose in IMDM containing 30% FCS, 1% bovine serum albumin (BSA), 2 mM L-glutamine and 10-4M 2-mercaptoethanol (Methocult H4230, Cell Systems®), IL-3 (lOng/ml ) (PeproTech) with different concentration of erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - lU/ml) with or without compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5% CO2. After 9 to 14 days erythroid burst foπning units (BFU-E) were counted from each of the plates. Afterwards cells were dissolved from methylcellulose with 0.1% NaCl solution. Cells were counted and stained with phycoerythrin (PE)-conjugated mAb against Glycophorin A (Pharmingen) to analyze differentiation.
BFU-E culture
lxlO5 Cord Blood CD34+ cells/ml were cultured in IMDM containing 15% BIT- 9500 (Cell Systems®), supplemented with IL-3 (10 ng/ml), IL-6 (10 ng/ml) and SCF
(25 ng/ml) (PeproTech) and incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%o CO . 3 and 5 days after initiation of culture an equal volume of fresh medium supplemented with 2X cytokines were added. On day 6 to 7 1-2 x 104 erythroid progenitors were plated in triplicate in 24-well plates with 1ml IMDM containing 10% FCS, 1% glutamine supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml), different concentration of erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) with or without compounds. Control cells were incubated with 0.1-0.2%) DMSO instead of compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%> CO . After 6 to 8 days cells were harvested and counted to analyze proliferation.
CD36+ cells
lxl 05 Cord Blood CD34+ cells/ml were cultured in IMDM containing 15% BIT- 9500 supplemented with IL-3 (10 ng/ml), IL-6 (lOng/ml) and SCF (25 ng/ml) and incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5%> CO2. 3 and 5 days after initiation of culture an equal volume of fresh medium supplemented with 2X cytokines were added. On day 6 to 7 cells were stained with PE-conjugated mAb against CD36 (Pharmingen) and CD36 cells were purified using anti-PE microbeads. and Mini MACS system (Miltenyi Biotec) according to the manufacture's instructions. l-2xl04 CD36+ cells were plated in triplicate 24well plates with 1ml IMDM containing 10% FCS, 1% Glutamine supplemented with SCF (25 ng/ml), different concentration of Erythropoietin (0.01 U/ml - 1 U/ml) with or without compounds. Control cells were incubated with 0.1-0.2%) DMSO instead of compounds. The cultures were incubated at 37°C in a fully humidified atmosphere with 5% CO2. After 6 to 8 days cells were harvested and counted to analyze proliferation.
Myelopoiesis and Thrombocytopoiesis Myeloid CD34+ Liquid Culture
5x 103 CD34+ cells isolated from peripheral blood, cord blood or from bone manow were pre-incubated in quadruplicate in 24-well plates in 1ml medium (StemSpan) with 15% FCS, SCF (20 ng/ml) and GM-CSF (2,5 ng/ml) for 6 to 7 days at 37°C and 5.5% CO2. Then compounds (0.1.1 or 10 μM in DMSO) with or without G-CSF (0.25 ng/ml; Neupogen®) were added and incubated for another 6 to 7 days. The number of the early myelopoietic CD15+/CDllb" cells and the number of the late myelopoietic CD15+/CDl lb+ cells were determined by cell count (proliferation) and FACS (fluorescent associated cell sorting) analysis (differentiation) at day 13-14.
Megakaryoid CD34r Liquid Culture
5 x 103 CD34+ cells isolated from peripheral blood, cord blood or from bone manow were incubated in quadruplicate 24-well plates in 1 ml serum-free medium with 2%o
BSA, SCF (20 ng/ml) and compounds ( 0.1,1 or 10 μM in DMSO) with or without
TPO (0-10 ng/ml) for 12 to 13 days at 37°C and 5% CO2. The number of the megakaryoid CD41+ cells (scatter profile) were determined by FACS analysis.
Megakaryocytes will be examined by microscope if necessary.
Hematological diseases: In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
Ery thr opoiesis/ Anemia
Compounds which have demonstrated effects on the drug target in vitro have been administered to normal or anemic animals orally or parenterally. In most cases, mice were used for compound testing. In some cases, other species, e.g. rats, hamsters or guinea pigs have been used in addition. Usually, repeated dosage is required for detection of changes in peripheral blood parameters. During the dosage period and up to five days after the last administration blood samples were drawn for analysis of red and white blood cell counts as well as platelet counts using an automated blood analyzer. In addition, erythropoiesis was assessed by manual hematocrit and reticulocyte count determination. For specific analysis of leukocyte differentiation fluorescent associated cell sorting (FACS) was used. Myelopoiesis and Thrombocytopoiesis Myelopoiesis
Immunocompetent Balb/c mice were treated with compounds at different doses (based on pharmacokinetic data) once/day or bid per-orally or parenterally for up to
4 days. The WBC (white blood cells count) and the neutrophil count were monitored by FACS (CDl lb+; scatter properties).
Immunocompromised Balb/c were generated by intravenous treatment with 5-FU (100 mg/kg i.p). 24 hours later the mice were treated with the test compound at different doses (based on pharmacokinetic data) once/day or bid per-orally or parenterally for up to 7 to 13 days. Peripheral blood counts (WBC, RBC, PLT) have been determined after retroorbital plexus puncture at days 5,7,11 and 14. For more detailed investigations the development of cellularity of femural bone manow and spleen were investigated by FACS analysis. The expression of specific differentiation markers on stem and progenitor cells (e.g. CD34, CD33, CD38, CDllb) and scatter properties were investigated.
Thrombocytopoiesis
Thrombopoietic compounds at different doses (based on pharmacokinetic data) were administered orally or parenterally following chemotherapy (Carboplatin, 100 mg/kg i.p) immunocompromised mice. After repeated administration (once/day or bid for five to seven days) peripheral blood platelets (automated blood analyzer) have been determined after retroorbital plexus punction at day 5, 7, 11, and 14. EXAMPLE 15
Atherosclerosis: In vivo target validation
Effects on plasma cholesterol levels including HDL cholesterol are typically assessed in humanized apo-AI transgenic mice. Modulation of human target proteins can be determined in conesponding transgenic mice (e.g., CETP transgenic mice). Triglyceride lowering is usually evaluated in ob/ob mice or Zucker rats. Animals are fed with normal diets or modified diets (e.g., enriched by 0.5 % cholesterol 20% coconut oil). Standard protocols consist of oral applications once daily for 7 to 10 days at doses ranging from 0,1 to 100 mg/kg. The compounds are dissolved (e.g., in Solutol/Ethanol/saline mixtures) and applied by oral gavage or intravenous injection. Before and at the end of the application period, blood samples are typically drawn by retroorbital punctuation. Plasma cholesterol and triglyceride levels are determined with standardized clinical diagnostic kits (e.g., INFINITY™ cholesterol reagent and
INFINITY™ triglyceride reagent; Sigma, St. Louis). HDL cholesterol is determined after phosphotungstic acid precipitation of non-HDL lipoproteins or FPLC gel filtration with post-column derivatization of cholesterol using the reagents mentioned above. Plasma levels of human apolipoprotein-AJ in relevant humanized transgenic mice are measured by immunoturbidimetry (Sigma).
Long-term anti-atherosclerotic potency of drug candidates are evaluated in Apo E- knockout mice. Therefore, animals are fed a standard chow diet (4,5 %> fat) or a Western diet (20 % fat) containing 1 to 100 mg/kg of the respective compounds for 3 to 5 month. Arterial lesions are quantified in serial cryosections of the proximal aorta by staining with Oil Red O and counterstaining with hematoxylin. Lesion area size is determined using an digital imaging system. EXAMPLE 16
In vivo testing of cardiovascular effects of test compounds Hemodynamics in anesthetized rats
Male Wistar rats weighing 300-350 g (Harlan Winkelmann, Borchen, Germany) are anesthetized with thiopental "Nycomed'O (Nycomed, Munich, Germany) 100 mg kg"1 i.p. A tracheotomy is performed, and catheters are inserted into the femoral artery for blood pressure and heart rate measurements (Gould pressure transducer and recorder, model RS 3400) and into the femoral vein for substance administration.
The animals are ventilated with room air and their body temperature is controlled. Test compounds are administered orally or intravenously.
Hemodynamics in conscious SHR
Female conscious SHR (MoellegaardDenmark, 220 - 290 g) are equipped with implantable radiotelemetry, and a data acquisition system (Data Sciences, St. Paul, MN, USA), comprising .a chronically implantable transducer/transmitter unit equipped with a fluid-filled catheter is used. The transmitter is implanted into the peritoneal cavity, and the sensing catheter is inserted into the descending* aorta.
Single administration of test compounds is performed as a solution in Transcutol®/ Cremophor®/ H2O (10/20/70 = v/v/v) given orally by gavage. The animals of control groups only receive the vehicle. Before treatment, mean blood pressure and heart rate of treated and untreated control groups are measured.
Hemodynamics in anesthetized dogs
Studies are performed on anesthetized dogs of either sex (body weight between 20- 30 kg). Anesthesia is initiated by slow intravenous injection of 25 mg kg"1 sodium thiopental (Trapanal®, Byk Gulden, Konstanz, Germany). The anesthesia is contin- ued and maintained throughout the experiment by continuous infusion of 0.04 mg kg-1 h-1 fentanyl (Fentanyl®, Janssen, Neuss, Germany) and 0.25 mg kg"1 h"1 droperidol (DihydrobenzperidolR, Janssen, Neuss, Germany). During this anaesthesia, heart rate is as low as 35-40 bpm due to increased vagal tone. Therefore, a parasympathetic blockade is achieved by intermittent injections of atropine (0.1 mg per animal) (AtropinsulfatR, Eifelfango, Bad Neuenahr, Germany). After intubation the animals are artificially ventilated at constant volume (EngstrδmR 300, Engstrόm, Sweden) with room air enriched with 30%> oxygen to maintain an end-tidal CO2 concentration of about 5% (NormocapR, Datex, Finland).
The following catheters are implanted for measurement of cardiovascular parameters: a tip catheter for recording of left ventricular pressure is inserted into the ventricle via the carotid artery (PC350, Millar Instruments, Houston, TX, USA), a hollow catheter is inserted into the femoral artery and connected to a strain gauge (type 4-327-1, Telos Medical, Upland, CA, USA for recording of arterial blood pressure, two venous catheters are inserted into either femoral vein and one additional catheter into a forearm vein for application of the anaesthetic and drugs, respectively, and an oxymetry catheter for recording of oxygen saturation is inserted into the coronary sinus via the jugular vein (Schwarzer IVH4, Mϋnchen, Germany).
After a left-sided thoracotomy the ramus circumflexus of the left coronary artery (LCX) is freed from connective tissue, and an electromagnetic flow probe (Gould Statham, Oxnard, CA, USA) is applied for measurement of coronary blood, flow. Arterial blood pressure, electrocardiogram (lead II), left ventricular pressure, first derivative of left ventricular pressure (dP/dt), heart rate, coronary blood flow, and oxygen saturation in the coronary sinus are continuously recorded on a pen recorder (Brush, Gould, Cleveland, OH, USA). The maximum of dP/dt is used as measure of left ventricular contractility (dP/dtmax). After completion of the instrumentation, an interval of 60 min is allowed for stabilization before the test compound is intravenously applied as bolus injections. Care is taken that all measured cardiovascular parameters have returned to control level before injection of the next dose. Each dose of the test compound is tested at least three times in different animals. The order of injection of the different doses is randomized in each animal.
EXAMPLE 17
Identification of test compound efficacy in an animal model of COPD
All mice are exposed to the smoke from 2 unfiltered cigarettes per day for 6 days per week for 14 weeks. Non-smoking, age-matched animals are used as controls. Animals are orally dosed with test compound or vehicle 1 hour before and 7 hours after smoke exposure. This twice-daily dosing regime is continued throughout the smoke exposure period. On day 7 of the weekly exposure, animals are given only 1 dose of test compound and are not exposed to cigarette smoke.
After the smoke exposure period, the mice are killed, their lungs inflated with phosphate-buffered formalin via their trachea, and then the lungs and heart are removed en bloc and fixed at 4°C for 48 hours. The lungs are then prepared for paraffin wax sectioning, and 4 mm sections are cut and mounted on glass slides. Sections are then stained with hematoxylin and eosin. Morphometric analysis of lung sections is done by calculation of the Linear Mean Intercept (LMI) parameter using a semi-automated computer image analysis system. Each slide (1 per mouse) contains several sections originating from multiple lobes. Twelve non-overlapping areas (each area covering 1.53 x 10-3 cm2) are randomly selected for LMI analysis. The 12 areas cover a minimum of two lobes per slide. Non-parenchymal components (airways, blood vessels) are excluded from the analysis to prevent artifactual enor. The mean intercept length is calculated for each mouse. Development of emphysema is seen as an increase in LMI.
LMI data are expressed as the median and statistical comparisons are done using the non-parametric Mann-Witney U-test. A 'p' value of <=0.05 is considered to be statistically significant. The potency of a test compound is evaluated by comparison of the tobacco smoke induced increase in LMI in animals dosed with either the test compound or just the vehicle used for administration of the compound.
EXAMPLE 18
Identification of test compound efficacy in an in vitro functional test relevant to COPD
The potency of test compounds is evaluated by measuring the inhibition of elastolysis induced by human alveolar macrophages. The cells are isolated from bronchoalveolar lavage samples taken from non-smokers, disease-free smokers, and smokers with COPD. Macrophage suspensions are added to test wells coated with tritiated elastin and incubated at 37°C for 3h to allow adherence of the cells. The wells are then carefully washed to remove non-adherent cells and fresh medium is added to each well. The cells are incubated at 37°C for up to 72 hours in the presence or absence of test compound. Every 24 hours the medium in each well is removed for analysis and replaced by fresh medium. Radioactivity released into the medium is measured by liquid scintillation counting and the rate of elastin degradation is calculated. The potency of a test compound is evaluated by comparing the rate of elastolysis measured with cells incubated in the presence or absence of the compound.
EXAMPLE 19
Allergies and immunological diseases: In vivo testing of compounds/target validation
Tests for activity ofT cells Mouse anti-CD3 induced cytokine production model
BALB/c mice are injected with a single intravenous injection of 10 μg of 145-2C11 (purified hamster anti-mouse CD3ε monoclonal antibodies, PHARMINGEN). A test compound is administered intraperitoneally 60 min prior to the anti-CD3 mAb injection. Blood is collected 90 minutes after the antibody injection. Serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 r.p.m. for 10 min. IL-2 and IL-4 levels in the serum are determined by an ELISA.
Tests for activity ofB cells
Mouse anti-IgD induced IgE production model
BALB/c mice are injected intravenously with 0.8 mg of purified goat anti-mouse IgD antibody or PBS (defined as day 0). Compound is administered intraperitoneally from day 0 to day 6. On day 7 blood is collected and serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 r.p.m. for 10 min. Serum total levels of IgE are determined by YAM ASA's ELISA kit and their Ig subtypes are done by an Ig ELISA KIT (Rougier Biotech's, Montreal, Canada).
Tests for activity ofmonocytes/macrophages
Mouse LPS-induced TNF-a production model
BALB/c mice are injected intraperitoneally with LPS (200 μg/mouse). Compound is administered intraperitoneally 1 hr before the LPS injection. Blood is collected at 90 min post-LPS injection and plasma is obtained. TNF-α concentration in the sample is determined using an ELISA kit.
Tests eosinophil activation
Mouse eotaxin-induced eosinophilia model
BALB/c mice are injected intradermally with a 2.5 ml of air on days -6 and -3 to prepare airpouch. On day 0 compound is admimstered intraperitoneally 60 min before eotaxin injection (3 μg/mouse, i.d.). IL-5 (300 ng/mouse) is injected intravenously 30 min before the eotaxin injection. After 4 hr of the eotaxin injection leukocytes in exudate is collected and the number of total cells is counted. The differential cell counts in the exudate are performed by staining with May-Grunwald Gimsa solution.
Tests activation ofTh2 cells Mouse D10 cell transfer model
D10.G4.1 cells (1 x 10 cells/mouse) containing 2 mg of conalbumin in saline is admimstered i.v. to AKR mice. After 6 hr blood is collected and serum is obtained by centrifugation at 3000 r.p.m. for lOmin. IL-4 and IL-5 level in serum are determined by ELISA kits. Compound is administered intraperitoneally at -4 and +1 hr after these cells injection.
Passive cutaneous anaphylaxis (PCA) test in rats
6 Weeks old male Wistar rats are sensitized intradermally (i.d.) on their shaved backs with 50 μl of 0.1 μg/ml mouse anti-DNP IgE monoclonal antibody (SPE-7) under a light anesthesia. After 24 hours, the rats are challenged intravenously with- 1 ml of saline containing 0.6 mg DNP-BSA (30) (LSL CO, LTD) and 0.005 g of Evans blue. Compounds are injected intraperitoneally (i.p.) 0.5 hr prior to antigen injection. Rats without the sensitization, challenge, and compound treatment are used for a blank
(control) and rats with sensitization, challenge and vehicle treatment are used to determine a value without inhibition. Thirty min after the challenge, the rats are killed, and the skin of the back is removed. Evans blue dye in the skin is extracted in formamide overnight at 63°C. Then an absorbance at 620 nm is measured to obtain the optical density of the leaked dye.
Percent inhibition of PCA with a compound is calculated as follows:
% inhibition = {(mean vehicle value - sample value)/(mean vehicle value - mean control value)} x 100 Anaphylactic bronchoconstriction in rats
6 Weeks old male Wistar rats are sensitized intravenously (i.v.) with 10 μg mouse anti-DNP IgE, SPE-7, and 1 days later, the rats are challenged intravenously with 0.3 ml of saline containing 1.5 mg DNP-BSA (30) under anesthesia with urethan
(1000 mg/kg, i.p.) and gallamine (50 mg/kg, i.v.). The trachea is cannulated for artificial respiration (2 ml / stroke, 70 strokes / min). Pulmonary inflation pressure (PIP) is recorded through a side-arm of cannula connected to pressure transducer. Change in PIP reflects change of both resistance and compliance of the lungs. To evaluate the drugs, each drug is given i.v. 5 min before challenge.
EXAMPLE 20
Expression profiling
Total cellular RNA was isolated from cells by one of two standard methods: 1) guanidine isothiocyanate/cesium chloride density gradient centrifugation [Kellogg et al. (1990)]; or with the Tri-Reagent protocol according to the manufacturer's specifications (Molecular Research Center, Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio). Total RNA prepared by the Tri-reagent protocol was treated with DNAse I to remove genomic
DNA contamination.
For relative quantitation of the mRNA distribution, total RNA from each cell or tissue source was first reverse transcribed. Eighty-five μg of total RNA was reverse transcribed using 1 μmole random hexamer primers, 0.5 mM each of dATP, dCTP, dGTP and dTTP (Qiagen, Hilden, Germany) and 3000 U RnaseQut (Invitrogen, Groningen, Netherlands) in a final volume of 680 μl. The first strand synthesis buffer and Omniscript reverse transcriptase (2 u/μl) were obtained from (Qiagen, Hilden, Germany). The reaction was incubated at 37°C for 90 minutes and cooled on ice. The volume was adjusted to 6800 μl with water, yielding a final concentration of 12.5 ng/μl of starting RNA. For relative quantitation of the distribution of mRNA in cells and tissues the Perkin Elmer ABI Prism R™ 7700 Sequence Detection system or Biorad iCycler was used according to the manufacturer's specifications and protocols. PCR reactions were set up to quantitate expression of the test gene and the housekeeping genes HPRT
(hypoxanthine phosphoribosyltransferase), GAPDH (glyceraldehyde-3 -phosphate dehydrogenase), β -actin, and others. Forward and reverse primers and probes were designed using the Perkin Elmer ABI Primer Express™ software and were synthesized by TibMolBiol (Berlin, Germany). The forward primer sequence was: Primerl ccctctccgtgtcctacaag (SEQ ID NO: 11). The reverse primer sequence was Primer2 tcatcgttctcctccaggtt (SEQ ID NO: 12). Probel agggccgcatgatgaaggacatct (SEQ ID NO: 13), labeled with FAM (carboxyfluorescein succinimidyl ester) as the reporter dye and TAMRA (carboxytetramethyhhodamine) as the quencher, was used as a probe. The following reagents were prepared in a total of 25 μl: lx TaqMan buffer A, 5.5 mM MgCl2, 200 nM of dATP, dCTP, dGTP, and dUTP, 0.025 U/μl AmpliTaq Gold™, 0.01 VI μl AmpErase, and Probel agggccgcatgatgaaggacatct, forward and reverse primers each at 200 nM, 200 nM , FAM TAMRA-labeled probe, and 5 μl of template cDNA. Thermal cycling parameters were 2 min at 50°C, followed by 10 min at 95°C, followed by 40 cycles of melting at 95°C for 15 sec and annealing/extending at 60°C for 1 min.
Calculation of corrected CT values
The CT (threshold cycle) value is calculated as described in the "Quantitative determination of nucleic acids" section. The CF-value (factor for threshold cycle conection) is calculated as follows:
1. PCR reactions were set up to quantitate the housekeeping genes (HKG) for each cDNA sample. 2. CTHKG-va ies (threshold cycle for housekeeping gene) were calculated as described in the "Quantitative determination of nucleic acids" section.
3. CTH G-mean values (CT mean value of all HKG tested on one cDNAs) of all HKG for each cDNA are calculated (n = number of HKG):
CTHKG-n-mean value = (CTκκ.Gi-value + CTHκ.G2-value + ... + CTHKG-n-value) / n
4. CTpannei mean value (CT mean value of all HKG in all tested cDNAs) = (CTHKGi-mean value + CTHKG2-mean value + ...+ CTRKG-y-mean value) / y
(y = number of cDNAs)
5. CFCDNA-n (conection factor for cDNA n) = CTpannei-mean value - CTHKG-n-mean value
6. CTcDNA-n (CT value of the tested gene for the cDNA n) + CFCDNA-Π (conection factor for cDNA n) = CT COΓ-CDNA-Π (coπected CT value for a gene on cDNA n)
Calculation of relative expression
Definition: highest CTcor-cDNA-n ≠ 40 is defined as CT00Γ-CDNA [high] Relative Expression = 2 (CTcOT"cDNA^h] " CTC-CDNA-H)
The following tissues were tested: substantia nigra, temporal lobe, cerebral cortex, parietal lobe, cerebral peduncles, hippocampus, vermis cerebelli, precentral gyrus, occipital lobe, Alzheimer cerebral cortex, Alzheimer brain frontal lobe, tonsilla cerebelli, brain, frontal lobe, cerebellum (left), cerebellum (right), pons, thalamus, rectum, ovary tumor, interventricular septum, coronary artery, Alzheimer brain, bone marrow CD33+ cells, breast, coronary artery sclerotic, corpus callosum, ileum chronic inflammation, lung COPD, fetal kidney, prostate BPH, dorsal root ganglia, pancreas liver cinhosis, heart atrium (right), pancreas liver cinhosis, lung tumor, fetal brain, MDA MB 231 cells (breast tumor), lung right lower lobe, HUVEC cells, neuroblastoma IMR32 cells, retina, aorta sclerotic, skin, thyroid tumor, penis, HEK CNS + APP, stomach tumor, postcentral gyrus, ileum, aorta, erythrocytes, liver cinhosis, artery, ureter, cerebral meninges, HEK CNS, fetal lung fibroblast EMR-90 cells, lung right upper lobe, esophagus, lymph node, lung right mid lobe, bone manow CD15+ cells, heart atrium (left), glial tumor H4 cells, breast tumor, glial tumor H4 cells + APP, bone manow CD71 cells, vein, spinal cord, ileum tumor, neuroblastoma SK-N-MC cells, cord blood CD71+ cells, coronary artery smooth muscle primary cells, cerebellum, HEK 293 cells, thrombocytes, colon tumor, testis, liver tumor, corpus cavernosum, kidney tumor, pancreas, lung, neuroblastoma SH5Y cells, bone manow CD34+ cells, HEP G2 cells, pericardium, esophagus tumor, cervix, heart ventricle (left), adrenal gland, kidney, uterus tumor, skeletal muscle, uterus, placenta, leukocytes (peripheral blood), spleen, fetal lung, stomach, Jurkat (T-cells), bone manow stromal cells, heart, trachea, small intestine, adipose, thyroid, ovary, liver, spleen liver cinhosis, fetal aorta, fetal heart, mammary gland, prostate,
HeLa cells (cervix tumor), fetal liver, colon, bladder, salivary gland, thymus, bone manow.. The results are shown in Table 1.
Table 1
Figure imgf000120_0001
Figure imgf000121_0001
Figure imgf000122_0001
Figure imgf000123_0001
Figure imgf000124_0001
REFERENCES
Mortensen OV, Kristensen AS, Wiborg O. Species-scanning mutagenesis of the serotonin transporter reveals residues essential in selective, high-affinity recognition of antidepressants. J Neurochem 2001 Oct;79(2):237-47.
Apparsundaram S, Sung U, Price RD, Blakely RD. Trafficking-Dependent and -Independent Pathways of Neurotransmitter Transporter Regulation Differentially Involving p38 Mitogen- Activated Protein Kinase Revealed in Studies of Insulin Modulation of Norepinephrine Transport in SK-N-SH Cells. J Pharmacol Exp Ther 2001 Nov;299(2):666-77.

Claims

1. An isolated polynucleotide being selected from the group consisting of:
a) a polynucleotide encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide comprising an amino acid sequence selected form the group consisting of: i) amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ED NO: 2; ii) the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 2; iii) amino acid sequences which are at least about 95% identical to the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ID NO: 5; and iv) the amino acid sequence shown in SEQ ED NO: 5;
b) a polynucleotide comprising the sequence of SEQ ID NO: 1 , 3 or 4;
c) a polynucleotide which hybridizes under stringent conditions to a polynucleotide specified in (a) and (b) and encodes a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide;
d) a polynucleotide the sequence of which deviates from the polynucleotide sequences specified in (a) to (c) due to the degeneration of the genetic code and encodes a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide; and
e) a polynucleotide which represents a fragment, derivative or allelic variation of a polynucleotide sequence specified in (a) to (d) and encodes a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide.
2. An expression vector containing any polynucleotide of claim 1.
3. A host cell containing the expression vector of claim 2.
4. A substantially purified neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide encoded by a polynucleotide of claim 1.
5. A method for producing a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, wherein the method comprises the following steps:
a) culturing the host cell of claim 3 under conditions suitable for the expression of the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide; and
b) recovering the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide from the host cell culture.
6. A method for detection of a polynucleotide encoding a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide in a biological sample comprising the following steps:
a) hybridizing any polynucleotide of claim 1 to a nucleic acid material of a biological sample, thereby forming a hybridization complex; and
b) detecting said hybridization complex.
7. The method of claim 6, wherein before hybridization, the nucleic acid material of the biological sample is amplified.
8. A method for the detection of a polynucleotide of claim 1 or a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide of claim 4 comprising the steps of:
a) contacting a biological sample with a reagent which specifically interacts with the polynucleotide or the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide and b) detecting the interaction.
9. A diagnostic kit for conducting the method of any one of claims 6 to 8.
10. A method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of a neurotransmitter transporter, comprising the steps of:
a) contacting a test compound with any neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide encoded by any polynucleotide of claiml ;
b) detecting binding of the test compound to the neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide, wherein a test compound which binds to the polypeptide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of a neurotransmitter transporter.
11. A method of screening for agents which regulate the activity of a neurotransmitter transporter, comprising the steps of:
a) contacting a test compound with a neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide encoded by any polynucleotide of claim 1 ; and
b) detecting a neurotransmitter transporter activity of the polypeptide, wherein a test compound which increases the neurotransmitter transporter activity is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for increasing the activity of the neurotransmitter transporter, and wherein a test compound which decreases the neurotransmitter transporter activity of the polypeptide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of the neurotransmitter transporter.
12. A method of screening for agents which decrease the activity of a neurotransmitter transporter, comprising the steps of:
a) contacting a test compound with any polynucleotide of claim 1 ; and
b) detecting binding of the test compound to the polynucleotide, wherein a test compound which binds to the polynucleotide is identified as a potential therapeutic agent for decreasing the activity of neurotransmitter transporter.
13. A method of reducing the activity of neurotransmitter transporter, comprising the step of contacting a cell with a reagent which specifically binds to any polynucleotide of claim 1 or any neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide of claim 4, whereby the activity of neurotransmitter transporter is reduced.
14. A reagent that modulates the activity of a neurofransmitter transporter polypeptide or a polynucleotide wherein said reagent is identified by the method of any of the claim 10 to 12.
15. A pharmaceutical composition, comprising the expression vector of claim 2 or the reagent of claim 14 and a phannaceutically acceptable carrier.
16. Use of the expression vector of claim 2 or the reagent of claim 14 in the preparation of a medicament for modulating the activity of a neurotransmitter transporter in a disease.
17. Use of claim 16 wherein the disease is a CNS disorder, a gastrointestinal disorder, a genitourological disorder, cancer, a hematological disorder, a cardiovascular disorder, COPD or asthma. '
PCT/EP2003/000025 2002-01-04 2003-01-03 Regulation of human neurotransmitter transporter Ceased WO2003059947A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2003235695A AU2003235695A1 (en) 2002-01-04 2003-01-03 Regulation of human neurotransmitter transporter

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US34433802P 2002-01-04 2002-01-04
US60/344,338 2002-01-04
US40630102P 2002-08-28 2002-08-28
US60/406,301 2002-08-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2003059947A1 true WO2003059947A1 (en) 2003-07-24

Family

ID=26993875

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/EP2003/000025 Ceased WO2003059947A1 (en) 2002-01-04 2003-01-03 Regulation of human neurotransmitter transporter

Country Status (2)

Country Link
AU (1) AU2003235695A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2003059947A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002017379A (en) * 2001-05-14 2002-01-22 Human Genome Sciences Inc Neurotransmitter transporter
GB2365432A (en) * 2000-05-19 2002-02-20 Glaxo Group Ltd Neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2365432A (en) * 2000-05-19 2002-02-20 Glaxo Group Ltd Neurotransmitter transporter polypeptide
JP2002017379A (en) * 2001-05-14 2002-01-22 Human Genome Sciences Inc Neurotransmitter transporter

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
QING-RONG LIU ET AL: "A RAT BRAIN CDNA ENCODING THE NEUROTRANSMITTER TRANSPORTER WITH AN UNUSUAL STRUCTURE", FEBS LETTERS, ELSEVIER SCIENCE PUBLISHERS, AMSTERDAM, NL, vol. 315, no. 2, 1993, pages 114 - 118, XP000612019, ISSN: 0014-5793 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
AU2003235695A1 (en) 2003-07-30

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2002072824A2 (en) Human transient receptor potential channel protein.
WO2003064639A1 (en) Regulation of human mitogen-activate protein kinase catalytic domain
US20040241156A1 (en) Regulation of human aminopeptidase n
WO2003018816A1 (en) Regulation of human dcamkl1-like serine/threonine protein kinase
US6908743B2 (en) Isolated human inositol polyphosphate 5-phosphatase
WO2003052088A2 (en) Regulation of human sialyltransferase
US20040152092A1 (en) Regulation of human phosphatidic acid phosphatase type 2c-like protein
WO2003059947A1 (en) Regulation of human neurotransmitter transporter
US20040115675A1 (en) Regulation of human transient receptor potential channel
WO2003064654A1 (en) Human serine/threonine protein kinase
WO2003018815A2 (en) Regulation of human g protein-couple receptor kinase
US20050255545A1 (en) Regulation of human hematopoietin receptor-like protein
US20040136976A1 (en) Regulation of human zinc carboxypeptidase b-like protein
WO2002033056A2 (en) Regulation of human serine-threonine protein kinase
US20040157282A1 (en) Regulation of human dual specificity protein phosphatase 7-like protein
WO2003046006A1 (en) Polynucleotides encoding nexin-related serine protease inhibitor
WO2003018786A2 (en) Human serine/threonine kinase
EP1404843A2 (en) Regulation of human nek-like serine/threonine protein kinase
WO2003056014A1 (en) Regulation of human mono (adp-ribosyl) transferase-like protein
WO2003066862A1 (en) Cloning of a human prolylhydroxylase-like protein
US20040043375A1 (en) Regulation of human serine-threonine protein kinase
WO2002090543A2 (en) Regulation of human phosphatidic acid phosphatase type 2c-like protein
WO2003070929A1 (en) Regulation of human zinc protease signature-containing protein
WO2002083887A2 (en) Regulation of human methionine aminopeptidase-like protein
WO2003051924A1 (en) Regulation of human integrin alpha-l

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ OM PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IT LU MC NL PT SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: JP